NN1-1741
MV5K00Be sure to read this Operation Manual and all the Safety Precautions
carefully for safe usage of this product.
Store this Operation Manual in a place so that it can be referred towhen necessary.

Manufacturer : EIKEN CHEMICAL CO., LTD.
4-19-9 TAITO, TAITO-KU, TOKYO 110-8408 JAPAN
Authorized Representative : Advena Ltd.
Tower Business Centre 2F Tower Street,
Swatar BKR 4013 MaltaImportant Copyright for this Operation Manual belongs to Eiken Chemical Co., Ltd. and Hitachi, Ltd. Use,reprinting, duplication, and modification of its contents in part or in whole without permission is strictly
prohibited.

 The content of this Operation Manual and system specifications may be changed without notice inorder to make improvements.

 We are not responsible for any damages or the like if the system is not used in accordance withthis Operation Manual.
 In vitro Diagnostic Medical Device Regulation 2017/746
 EN 61010-1:

Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,
control, and laboratory use Part 1: General requirements.

 IEC 61010-2-101:

Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,
control, and laboratory use - Part 2-101: Particular requirements for invitro diagnostic (IVD) medical equipment.

 EN 61326-1:

Electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use.
EMC requirements. General requirements.

 EN 61326-2-6:Electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use.
EMC requirements. Particular requirements. In vitro diagnostic (IVD)
medical equipment.

i
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Introduction
Prior to reading this Operation Manual
OC-SENSOR Ceres is a mobile discrete method fully automated fecal occult blood analyzer (hereinafterreferred to as the “system”).
The system and its Operation Manual are meant for doctors, clinical laboratory technicians, and those
who have received specialized education or training in test procedures that use diagnosis systems outside
the body.
Read this Operation Manual carefully prior to use, in order to use the system properly.
Note that using the system in a manner not described in this Operation Manual or under conditions outside
the system specifications could negatively impact the system’s safety and performance.
Be sure to use the system according to the instructions in this Operation Manual.
All serious accidents occurred in connection with the system need to be reported to regulating authoritiesof the countries in which the manufacturer, users, and/or patients live.

Operation Manual organization
This Operation Manual consists of the following chapters:

Introduction:

Chapter 1

Overview:

Chapter 2

Basic Operation:

Chapter 3

AppliedOperations:

Chapter 4
Chapter 5

Prep Functions
Maintenance::

Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Appendix

Settings
Error Handling:::

Describes the organization and notation of this Operation
Manual, as well as Safety Precautions for using the system.
Gives an overview of the system, including measurement
principles and analysis flow, as well as the names andfunctions of each part.
Gives an overview of initial settings prior to use and basic
operation of the system.
Describes advanced operation of the system, such as
searching, recalculation, output, deletion, and accuracy
control of the test data.
Describes preparatory functions such as priming.
Describes inspections and maintenance procedures users
should follow in order to safely use the system, maintainperformance, and discover malfunctions and the like as earlyas possible.
Gives details on initial settings for operating the system.
Explains how to read the error screen.
Explains data processing, analysis operations, printing
examples, and errors.

Index/Glossaryii
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Prior to reading this Operation Manual

Introduction

Operation Manual Notation
This Operation Manual explains matters that must be followed in order to safely use the system, prevent
danger to the user and others, and prevent damage to property.

“Warnings,” “Cautions,” and “Requests”

Warning

Indicates the possibility that improper use of the system will cause death orsevere personal injury.

CautionIndicates the possibility that improper use of the system will cause personal
injury or damage to property.

Request

Indicates something the user should do to prevent damage or degradation to
the product and to use the system efficiently.

Severe injuries:

Injuries that result in permanent damage or which require long-term hospitalization or outpatient treatment.
Examples include loss of eyesight, injury, burns, electric shock, fractures, poisoning, and infection.

Slight injuries:

Injuries that do not require long-term hospitalization or outpatient treatment.

Symbols
Caution symbols:

Indicate that users should use caution.

Attention

Biohazard

Electrical shock Pinching hazard

Prohibition symbols: Indicate prohibited actions.

Prohibited

Disassembly
prohibited

Instructional symbol: Indicate instructions users must follow.

Required

Other notations:

Describe related supplementary notes.

{}:

Indicate something that can be operated, such as a tab or a button on the screen.

[]:

Indicate the name of a screen, or settings that require selection or input.

:

Indicate reference locations.

iii
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Safety Precautions
Be sure to read this section before using the system.

Installation precautions

Power supplies and cords
Warning

Prohibited Do not connect the power cord to an extension cord or an adaptor plug.
 Do not connect or disconnect the power plug with wet hands.
 Do not damage or alter the power cord.
 Do not apply excessive force to the power cord.
 Do not fasten the power cord using metal fixtures or the like.
 Do not use power cords other than that provided.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to electric shock or fire.

Warning Make sure that the system is grounded.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to electric shock.
Required Connect to the appropriate power supply.
Power supply voltage: 230 V AC
RequiredFrequency: 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 630 VA or lower
Socket: The power plug uses a protective earth terminal.
Use a fixed power socket (electrical outlet for medical use) that is correctly
grounded.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to electric shock or fire.

iv
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Installation precautions

SafetyPrecautions

Installation conditions
CautionRequired Use indoors.
 Install and store at locations not exposed to water.
 Avoid harmful effects that can result from barometric pressure, atmospherictemperature, humidity, poor ventilation, sunlight, dust, saline matter, or air
including sulfur.
 Install in a location that is flat and free of vibration or impact.
 Install in a location other than a chemical storage area or in a location freefrom gas emissions.
 The installation location must be horizontal.

Caution Do not move the system.
This system should only be installed or moved by a maintenance person who has been certified
by Eiken Chemical.
Required Use a platform that can support the weight of the system. Make sure that theplatform is stable.

If the system falls, it could cause unexpected injury.

 Install the system in a location with plenty of space, so as to not hinder
operation or maintenance.
(The maximum height when the safety guard is opened is approx. 90 cm. Therefore, the heightfrom the floor to the ceiling must be 100 cm or higher.)(See the following drawing for the installation spacing.)

10 cm or more

63 cm

20 cm or more

36 cm

20 cm or more

 Do not place the system near the exhaust ports of heating and coolingequipment.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to erroneous analysis result.

v
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Installation precautions

Environmental conditions

SafetyPrecautions

Caution Adhere to the following environmental conditions:
Usage conditions
Temperature: 15 - 30℃(Within ± 2 ℃ change during testing)
Altitude: 20 - 80% (no condensation)

Required

Height of 2,000 m or less
*Pollution degree 2*
Over-voltage category II*

Storage conditions

Temperature: -10 - 50 ℃
Humidity: 10 - 90 % (no condensation)

Transport conditions

Temperature: -10 - 50 ℃
Humidity: 10 - 90 % (no condensation)

Items marked with “*” are standard conditions based on EN 61010-1

Security
CautionObserve the following to prevent leakage or falsification of data.

Required To avoid unauthorized access, restrict the operation of the system toauthorized personnel only.
 Make sure that only verified computers are connected to the system network.
 Conduct cybersecurity assessments regularly to ensure an appropriate levelof data security.
 Do not use personally identifiable information for sample IDs and patient
IDs. Instead, use anonymized IDs for management.
 For network security, address the security of IT infrastructure in your facility
to ensure that IT security is not compromised by malicious software or hacker
attacks.
- Protect all devices and services used in your facility from malicious
software and unauthorized access.
- Connect the system only to the internal network of your facility that is notconnected to the external network.
 Regularly protect your data by storing it on external media. There is apossibility of data corruption due to cyber attacks, disasters, etc.
 Please review your users and passwords regularly.
 Check the USB flash drive in advance for viruses and make sure that noviruses have been detected.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection by computer viruses.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to leakage or falsification of information.

vi
NN1-1741 Rev.9
Rev.1

Safety
Precautions

Usage precautions

Work and operation precautions
Warning Wear protective gear when handling the samples, reagents, washingsolution, and test cells.
 After using the system, wash hands thoroughly.
Biohazard

Biohazard

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection from samples.

 Dispose of drainage after using the system.
 Make sure that drainage does not leak into the area surrounding the device
when detaching the drain tank hose.
 Make sure the drain tank is empty prior to using the system.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection from samples.

 Be careful of sample splattering when removing sampling bottles from arack.
 Be careful of sample splattering when disposing of measurement cells.
Biohazard

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection from sample.

 Do not disassemble the system.
 Do not remove any of the system’s exterior parts.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to electric shock.
Disassembly
prohibited

Electrical shock Do not spill any samples or reagents inside the system.
 Do not touch the system with wet hands.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to electric shock.
Prohibited Do not mix the washing solution with acid washing solution.
Failure to observe this precaution may damage the operator’s health.
Prohibitedvii
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.2
NN1-1741

Usage precautions

SafetyPrecautions

Caution Correctly connect the purified water/washing solution bottle, drain tank,and each hose.
 Periodically monitor the accuracy control function.
Required

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to false diagnoses.

Caution Do not connect to any device other than a USB stick.
For details of recommended items, contact the manufacturer.
Required Manage external media appropriately. Check for computer viruses
periodically.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection from a computer virus.

Caution Use only reagents that have not expired.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to false diagnoses.
RequiredCaution If the reagent refrigerator becomes abnormally hot, dispose of the stored
reagents.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to false diagnoses.
RequiredCaution Do not turn off the power while testing.
 Do not turn off the primary power switch until the system shut downs
completely.
Required

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to a damaged hard disk or loss of data.

Caution Use the designated sample cup.
 Do not reuse measurement cells.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to false diagnoses.
RequiredCaution Do not touch the touch panel with wet hands.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to system breakdown.
Requiredviii
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Usage precautions

SafetyPrecautions

Maintenance and inspections
Warning Wear protective gear when performing maintenance and inspections.
 The tip of the nozzle is sharp. Use caution when handling it.
 The tip of the puncture needle is sharp. Use caution when handling.
Biohazard

Failure to observe these precautions may lead to infection from the samples.

Request Inspect the system before starting operations each time.
 Check that there is no water leakage.
 No devices other than the designated ones should be connected.
 The environmental conditions are satisfied.

Request If the system has not been used for some time, check that the system
operates properly prior to use.

Request If system failure is suspected, do not touch the system, and do not attach afailure notice or other notification. Immediately contact the manufacturer ora legal representative.

Disposing of drainage and waste
Warning

Biohazard

 Dispose of drainage and waste (reagent containers, reaction containers,
sampling bottles, sample cups, and measurement cells) appropriately byfollowing the facility safety management procedures and the instructions of
the person in charge of infectious medical waste management.
(Some examples of infectious medical waste include reagent containers, reaction
containers, sampling bottles, sample cups, and measurement cells.)

 Refer to the usage instructions attached to the reagent for information on
how to dispose the reagent containers and drainage.
 Contact the manufacturer or your legal representative when disposing thesystem.
 Wear protective tools when disposing.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to environmental pollution.

ix
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Safety
Precautions

Caution labels and where they are affixed
The following caution labels are affixed to the system.
Understand where the caution labels are and what they mean before using the system.

x
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Identification plate

SafetyPrecautions

Drainage tank
Caution Label

Meaning
Keep out of operational range during system operation.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to injury.

Do not handle drainage with bare hands.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection and pollution.

(Fan)
Do not touch the fan while it is operating.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to injury.

(Connecting port)
Connect only permitted device.
When any device other than those permitted is connected, the system may experienceerroneous operation.

Primary power switch and system switch
Primary power switch OFF
Primary power switch ON
System switch

Identification plate
Identification Label (DRAFT)

xi
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Table of Contents
Introduction
Prior to reading this Operation Manual ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ ii
Operation Manual organization ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ ii
Operation Manual Notation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ iii

Safety Precautions
Installation precautions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ iv
Power supplies and cords ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ iv
Installation conditions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ v
Environmental conditions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ vi
Security ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ vi
Usage precautions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ vii
Work and operation precautions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ vii
Maintenance and inspections ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ ix
Disposing of drainage and wasteꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ ix
Caution labels and where they are affixed ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ x
Table of Contentsꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ xii

Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Features of OC-SENSOR Ceres ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 2
1.2 Application ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 2
1.3 Measurement Principles ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 2
1.4 System Configuration ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 3
1.5 Test Flowꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 5
1.6 System Specification ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 6
1.7 Reagents Used by the Systemꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 8
1.8 System Dimensions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 9
1.9 Names and Functions of Parts ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 10
1.9.1 Exterior Partsꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 10
1.9.2 Internal Parts ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 12
1.9.3 Accessories and Others ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 14

xii
NN1-1741 Rev.2
Rev.1
NN1-1741

Chapter 2 Basic Operation

1

2.1 Basic Screen Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 16

Overview

2.1.1 [MENU] screen and functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 16
2.1.2 Screen Configuration and Button Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 17
2.1.3 [Analyzing] Screen and Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 23

2

2.1.4 [Set reagent] Screen and Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 25

Basic
Operation

2.2 Starting the System ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 27
2.3 Logging In ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 28
2.4 Initial Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 31

3

2.4.1 System Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 31

AppliedOperations

2.4.2 Protocol Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 33
2.5 Daily Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 35
2.5.1 Flow of Daily Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 35

4

2.5.2 Setting the Reagentꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 37

Prep
Functions2.5.3 Preparing Purified Water ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 41
2.5.4 Preparing Washing Solution ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 42
2.5.5 Washing Solution and Purified Water Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 43
2.5.6 Setting Printer Sheets ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 445

2.5.7 Checking the Drain Tank ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 46

Maintenance2.5.8 Creating CC ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 47
2.5.9 Setting Samples ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 58
2.5.10 Starting Analysis (Initial Test) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 60

6

2.5.11 Start Analyzing (Retest) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 62

Settings

2.5.12 Starting Analysis (QC Sample) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 65
2.5.13 Additionally Setting the Sample ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 70
2.5.14 Checking the Analysis Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 72

7

2.5.15 Ending the Analysis ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 75

Error
Handling

2.6 Inspections and Cleaning After Useꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 77
2.6.1 Removing the Racks ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 77
2.6.2 Replacing Cells ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 78
2.6.3 Cleaning Various Sections ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 84
2.6.4 Opening Parts Checklist ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 86
2.6.5 Opening the Error Log ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 88
2.7 Shutting Down the System (Shut Down Mode) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 89
2.8 Processing the Drain Tank ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 91

xiii
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Table of Contents

Chapter 3 Applied Operations
3.1 Processing Test Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 94
3.1.1 Opening the [Process Data] Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 94
3.1.2 Opening the [Test Data] Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 96
3.1.3 Specifying a {Date} for the Test Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 100
3.1.4 Selecting {Select-s} for Test Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 102
3.1.5 Reading “Test Data” Not Displayed in the List (Re-reading) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 104
3.1.6 Reading “Test Data” in External Media (Switching the External Media) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 105
3.1.7 Searching the Test Dataꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 106
3.1.8 Outputting Test Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 109
3.2 Editing Sample IDs ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 112
3.3 Replicationꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 114
3.3.1 Displaying the [Sample Replication] Screen (Sample) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 114
3.3.2 Displaying [Replicate (STD)] Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 118
3.3.3 Saving Replication Data (STD) to External Media ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 120
3.3.4 Displaying the [Replicate (QC)] Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 121
3.3.5 Specifying {Select-s} for Replication Dataꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 123
3.3.6 Specifying Replication Data by {Select Item] ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 125
3.3.7 Searching Replication Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 126
3.3.8 Editing and Recalculating CC ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 128
3.3.9 Displaying and Printing a Time Course (Sample) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 131
3.3.10 Displaying and Printing a Time Course (STD) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 132
3.3.11 Changing the Time Course Range (Sample) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 133
3.3.12 Changing the Time Course Range (STD) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 135
3.4 Accuracy Control ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 137
3.4.1 Displaying the QC Lot List ([QC lot select] screen) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 137
3.4.2 Selecting a QC Lot ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 140
3.4.3 Deleting a QC Lot ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 141
3.4.4 Opening the [Intra-day/Inter-day] Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 142
3.4.5 Editing (Recalculating) Intra-Day and Inter-Day Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 145
3.4.6 Deleting Intra-Day and Inter-Day Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 147
3.4.7 Selecting Intra-Day and Inter-Day Data with {Select-s} ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 149—

3.4.8 Displaying X-R Control ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 151
̶

3.4.9 Changing the Range of X-R Control ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 155
3.5 LOG IN/LOG OUT ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 157
3.5.1 LOGIN ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 157
3.5.2 LOGGING OUT ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 158
3.5.3 Changing a Password ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 159

xiv
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Chapter 4 Prep Functions

1

4.1 Initialization ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 162

Overview

4.2 Priming ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 164
4.3 Washing ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 166

2

Chapter 5 Maintenance

Basic
Operation

5.1 Inspection and Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 170
5.1.1 Opening the [Maintenance] Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 170
5.1.2 Cleaning Touch Panel (Daily) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 1713

5.1.3 Cleaning the Rack Lane (Daily) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 172

AppliedOperations

5.1.4 Cleaning Washing Solution and Purified Water Compartments (Daily) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 173
5.1.5 Cleaning the Reagent Cap Tray (Daily) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 174
5.1.6 Cleaning the Nozzles (Weekly) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 175

4

5.1.7 Cleaning the Racks (Weekly) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 176

Prep
Functions5.1.8 Cleaning Bottles/Tanks (Monthly) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 177
5.2 List of Parts to Check and Replaceꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 178
5.2.1 Opening the [Parts checklist] Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 178

5

5.2.2 Replacing Parts ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 179

Maintenance

Chapter 6 Settings
6.1 System Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 182
6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 182

6

6.1.2 Sample Barcode Settings (Detailed Settings for Each Barcode Type) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 184

Settings

6.1.3 Rack Setting ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 188
6.1.4 Config. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 190
6.1.5 Data Output - [Selecting Data Output Destination] ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 192

7

6.1.6 Data output - [Online Settings] ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 195

Error
Handling

6.1.7 Data Output - [Test Setting]ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 198
6.1.8 Output Format Settings (Basic Format) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 200
6.1.9 Output Format Setting (External Media)ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 203
6.1.10 User Account Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 206
6.1.11 Language Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 210
6.1.12 Operator Mode ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 212
6.1.13 Printing the System Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 214
6.1.14 Backing Up System Settings and Protocol Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 215
6.1.15 Restoring System Settings and Protocol Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 216

xv
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Table of Contents
6.2 Protocol Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 217
6.2.1 Sample/QC Protocol Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 217
6.2.2 CC Protocol Settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 224

Chapter7 Error Handling
7.1 How to Read the [FUNCTION ERROR] Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 228
7.2 Error Handling Buttons ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 229
7.3 Cancelling Errors ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 230

xvi
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Appendix

1

1 Calculation Processes

Overview

1.1 STD/QC Sample Measured Data Check ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 235
1.2 DA Value Calculation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 236
1.3 Measured Data (Concentration) Calculation and Qualitative Assessmentꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 237

2

1.4 Prozone Check ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 238

Basic
Operation

1.5 Reagent Blank Check ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 240
1.6 Calculate Cell Blank ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 240

3

2 Printing Example

AppliedOperations

2.1 Positive Sample Printing ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 242
2.2 Final Result Printing at Retesting ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 243
2.3 Printing when STD Sample and QC Sample are Measured ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 245

4

2.4 Printing Error Messages ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 247

Prep
Functions

3 Error List
3.1 ERR# 0-1001 to 0-3005 (Main) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 248
3.2 ERR# 1-001 - 1-200(SS1) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 258

5

3.3 ERR# 2-001 - 2-200(SS2) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 264

Maintenance

4 Saving to External Media
4.1 Sample Measured Data Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 271

6

4.2 Sample Replication Informationꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 273

Settings

4.3 QC Measured Data Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 275
4.4 QC Replication Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 277
4.5 STD Measured Data Informationꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 279

7

4.6 STD Replication Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 280

Error
Handling

4.7 Time Course Data Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 281
4.8 List of Error Codes for External Media Output ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 282

5 Management USB Stick Setting
5.1 How to Set a Management USB Stick ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 283

Index/Glossary
Index ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 285
Glossary ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 292

NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.8
NN1-1741

xvii

xviii
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Chapter 1 Overview
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.2
Rev.1

Features of OC-SENSOR Ceres
Application
Measurement Principles
System Configuration
Test Flow
System Specification
Reagents Used by the System
System Dimensions
Names and Functions of Parts

1

1

Chapter 1 Overview

Overview

This section describes the general outline and the configuration of the system, “Mobile discrete method Fully

2

automated fecal occult blood analyzer (fecal occult blood test) OC-SENSOR Ceres”

Basic
Operation

1.1

3
AppliedOperations

Features of OC-SENSOR Ceres● The OC-SENSOR Ceres (hereinafter called “the system”) features automatic sample dilution, awide test range, countermeasures against carryover, prozone judgment, and more.
● The system is always cooling the reagents. Therefore, samples can be tested anytime.

4
Prep
Functions

1.2

Application

The system measures the objective material in the sample or hemoglobin in feces by detecting changes in

5transmitted light by latex agglutination reaction.

Maintenance

1.3

Measurement Principles

6
Settings

Latex agglutination turbidimetry
An antigen-antibody reaction is a specific reaction that occurs between an antigenic determinant and theactive group of an antibody. The amount of bonding depends on the concentrations of the antigen and7antibody.

Error
Handling

A latex agglutination reaction is the clumping of antigen- or antibody-sensitized polystyrene latex particles
caused by an antigen-antibody reaction. Light is passed through the reaction liquid to measure changes in
the intensity of the transmitted light beam. This method, used by this system, is called “latex turbidimetry.”2
NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.2
Rev.1

1.4

1

System Configuration

Overview

Before using the system, check the configuration.
Name

Q’ty

Main body

Mobile discrete method Fully
automated fecal occult blood analyzer(OC-SENSOR Ceres)

Accessories① Software package
 Software program2

Remarks

Basic
Operation

1 set

3
1 set

Installed on the hard disk Sample rack

1 box

2 pc/box

 STD and QC rack

1 box

1 pc/box

AppliedOperations② Racks4
PrepFunctions③ Tanks and bottles
 Purified water bottle (Purified Water)

1

500 mL bottle Washing solution bottle (Wash
Solution)

1

500 mL bottle Drain tank

1

5L tank Beaker1

 Replacement bottle for purified water

1

5
Maintenance

500 mL bottle④ Others
1

6 Barcode labels for racks

3 pc“01-10,” “11-20,” “91-100”

Settings

 Bottle and tank labels

1 set

Already attached to the bottles andtanks

 Sample cup

1 bag Power supply cable

Documents

 Thermal roll paper

1 roll Binding band

5 pc

 Operation Manual

7

W : 58mm / D : 40mm

Error
Handling

1

3
Rev.2
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1.4 System Configuration

1



Overview

2

Accessories (sold separately)
Name

Product code

Quantity

Remarks

DISPO-11

M-5K12

1 box

55 x 20 pc

OptionName

Quantity

Remarks

Handy barcode reader

1 pc/box

Used to read the calibrator and QC barcodes.

2D code reader replacement kit

1 pc/box

3

340 nm detection kit

1 pc/box

Used when developing a new item

AppliedOperations

600 nm detection kit

1 pc/box

Used when developing a new item

800 nm detection kit

1 pc/box

Used when developing a new item

Basic
Operation4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

4
NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.6

1.5

1

Test Flow

Overview

The test flow of this system is as follows
1

R1 reagent dispense2

The reagent nozzle dispenses R1 reagent to the test cells.

Basic
Operation↓
Sample dispense

The sample nozzle dispenses the sample to the test cells.

3

↓
Mix ①

AppliedOperations

The mixer mixes the liquid in the test cells.

↓

Number of cycles (T)R2 reagent dispense

The reagent nozzle dispenses R2 reagent to the test cells.

4Prep
Functions↓Mix ②

The mixer mixes the liquid in the test cells.

↓
2

Test

5

The transmitted light is measured in each cycle after the second cycle.

Maintenance

↓
3

Test

:

↓

:

Test

:

:

6
Settings

The required time for one cycle is 40 seconds.

7
Error
Handling

5
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1

1.6

Overview2System Specification

Basic specifications
Name
Measurement principles
MethodTest mode
Samples
Processing capacity
Sample setting
Sample container

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Calibration curves
Retest4
PrepFunctions

Reaction cuvette
Sample dispensing

5

Sample dispensing range

MaintenanceSpecification
Latex turbidimetry method
Discrete method, random access method (max. 3 items)
1-step rate
Feces
Up to 90 tests/hour (40 seconds per cycle)
20 samples:10 samples x 2 racks
OC-Auto Sampling Bottle 3 (Eiken Chemical proprietary bottle)
Sample cup (A20)
Automatic generation of calibration curves
Automatic re-test function
Dilution re-test function (x10, x20, x100, x200, x400)
Five disposable cuvettes (5 x 11 reaction cells)

Sampling nozzle with liquid level detection sensor and nozzle cleaning
function
0, 3-21µL (0.1µL unit)* For protocol settings, please set dispensing volume specified by the manufacturer.

Reagent dispensing

6

Reagent dispensing range

Sampling nozzle with liquid level detection sensor and nozzle cleaning
function
0, 30-210µL (1µL unit)* For protocol settings, please set dispensing volume specified by the manufacturer.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

MixingBarcodesProzone check
Check reagent blank
Reagent loading capacity

Mixer rotating system (with cleaning function)
Rack barcodes/Sample barcodes and Reagent barcodes
PRC method, RBC method, OR method
Detection using A1 value check, DA1 value check3reagent sets (R1, R2) and 2 sample diluent buffers
Hemoglobin, Calprotectin

Cooling system

Peltier cooling system surrounding reagent storage area (working for
24 hours)
Reaction table, Silicone rubber heating System
LED (wavelengths: 660 nm, 340 nm,* 600 nm,* 800 nm*)

Thermal insulation system
Light source*: Optional wavelengths.

Detector
Operation control/dataprocessing
External connections
Sample dispensing accuracy
Reagent dispensing accuracy
Security

PhotodiodeMultiple CPU configuration with internal network
RS-232C, Ethernet
CV0.5% or less at 10 µL
CV0.5% or less at 30 µL
Whitelist

6
NN1-1741 Rev.9
Rev.1
NN1-1741

1.6 System Specification

Name

1

Specification

Inputs
Outputs

Overview

Color LCD (8.4 inch) touch panel, barcode reader
Thermal printer (58 mm wide thermal paper)
Integrated hard disk
External media USB connection
Approx. 360 mm x 625 mm x 545 mm (W x D x H)
Approx. 43 kg~100-240 V 50/60 Hz 630VA

Dimensions
Weight
Power

2
Basic
Operation

The dimensional tolerance is +/- 10%, and weight tolerance is +/- 10%.



3

Sample barcode specification
Type

Number of digits

Check digit(including start and stop characters)

Modulus 10/3 weight
Modulus 16
Modulus 11
Modulus 10/2 weight
7 check DR
Weighing modulus 11
Loons

ITF

6- 15

Modulus 10/3 weight

IND 2 of 5
COOP 2 of 5
CODE39

6- 15
6- 15
5- 15

None

NW-7

5- 17

AppliedOperations

Remarks4
PrepFunctions5
Maintenance

None

Modulus 43(Including start and stop characters)

JAN
CODE128
QR
Data Matrix

5- 15
5- 15
6- 50
6- 50

PDF417
6- 50
GS1 DataBar
6- 50
Omni-directionalModulus 10/3 weight

6

None

Settings

None
None
None

2D code reader(optional)

7

None

Error
Handling

Usable life
Eight years (self-certified [based on manufacturer data]) from start of use (installation)* Assuming periodic inspection/maintenance, parts replacement, and repairs/overhaul (asrequired after inspection) are conducted as described in this Operation Manual.

NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.2
Rev.1
Rev.8

7

1

1.7

Overview

Reagents Used by the System

Refer to the attached documents for reagents used in this system.

2
BasicOperation



Reagents for hemoglobin testing
Product nameProduct code

Package

3

OC-SENSOR FIT (for OC-SENSOR Ceres)

V-PH01

2 × 6 mL
2 × 20 mL

AppliedOperations

OC-FIT Calibrator (for OC-SENSOR Ceres)

V-PH02

6 × 1 mL (concentration in 6 levels)

OC-FIT Control LV1

V-PH53

2 × 5 mL

OC-FIT Control LV2

V-PH542 × 5 mL

OC-FIT Control LV3

V-PH592 × 5 mL

Product nameProduct code

Package

OC-SENSOR Sample Diluent

V-PH082 × 20 mL

Product nameProduct code

Package

OC-FCa Reagent (for OC-SENSOR Ceres)

V-PH09OC-FCa Calibrator

V-PH12

6 × 1 mL (concentration in 6 levels)

OC-FCa Control LV1

V-PH13

2 × 5 mL

OC-FCa Control LV2

V-PH142 × 5 mL

OC-FCa Control LV3

V-PH152 × 5 mL4
Prep
Functions

5
Maintenance6CommonReagents for calprotectin testing

Settings

7
Error
Handling

2 × 8 mL
2 × 15mL

8
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1.8

1

System Dimensions

Overview

2

36 cm

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

63 cm

4
Prep
Functions5

Top view

Maintenance

36 cm

6
Settings

7

55 cm

Error
Handling

Front view9
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1.9 Names and Functions of Parts

1

1.9

Names and Functions of Parts

Overview

1.9.1 Exterior Parts

2(5) Thermal printer

Basic
Operation(9) Bottle compartment(Wash, Purified water)

3(3) Safety guard

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance(2) System switch

6(6) Control panel

Settings(4) Rack lane cover7
Error
Handling(1) Primary power switch(8) Power cord

(7) External media port

10
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1.9 Names and Functions of Parts⑩ Washing solution bottle(Wash Solution)⑪ Purified water bottle(Purified Water)

1⑫ Drain tank (Drain)

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Name① Primary power switch

Function
When turning on the primary power switch, the system is powered on. Usually,
keep the system power on.
Switch OFF

4Prep
FunctionsSwitch ON

5
Maintenance
After turning on the primary power switch, cold storage of the reagent starts when
the application starts up.
When turning off the primary power switch, cold storage of the reagent cooler isturned off.

② System switch③ Safety guard④ Rack lane cover⑤ Thermal printer⑥ Control panel(Including the touch panel)⑦ External media connector⑧ Power supply cord
⑨ Washing solution and purified
water setting section⑩ Washing solution bottle(Wash Solution)⑪ Purified water bottle(Purified Water)⑫ Waste liquid tank(Drain)

NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.9

When turning on the system, the application starts, and the reaction tabletemperature is controlled.
The cover to prevent accidents during the system operation. It is automaticallylocked during the system operation.
The cover to prevent accidents during the system operation. It is automaticallylocked while using the rack.
Prints setup conditions, test results, error messages, or other data.
Shows operation screens and analytical results. Operate by directly touching thescreen.
The external media to save the test data is connected.
The power cord for this system.
Section to set the washing solution bottle and the purified water bottle.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

Fill with wash solution.
Fill with purified water.
The wasted liquid is stored from the sample nozzle, reagent nozzle, and mixer.

11

1.9 Names and Functions of Parts

1

1.9.2

Overview

Internal Parts(8) Reagent dispensing pump2(9) Sample dispensing pump

Basic
Operation(10) Sample nozzle(11) Squeezing system(7) Mixer(4) Overflow cellfor sample

3
AppliedOperations(3) Puncturing system

4
Prep
Functions(12) Barcode reader(inside the cover)5
Maintenance(1) Rack lane

6
Settings(13) Cell batch
replacement
tool(4) Overflow cellfor mixer

7(6) Reaction table

Error
Handling(5) Reagent nozzle(14) Reagent cap tray
(4) Overflow cellfor reagent(2) Reagent refrigerator

12
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1.9 Names and Functions of Parts

Name

Function① Rack lane

Rack setting location. Up to two racks can be set.

② Reagent refrigerator

Reagent (20 mL special container) location. The temperature isalways kept at 9 to 15 ℃.

③ Puncturing system

Punctures the double aluminum seals on the sample bottle.

④ Overflow cell (OF)For sample nozzle
Washes the sample nozzle inner and outer walls with purified
water and washing solution. Waste liquid is sent to the drain tank.
For reagent nozzle
Washes the reagent nozzle inner and outer walls with purified
water. Waste liquid is sent to the drain tank.
For mixer
Washes the mixer needle with purified water and washingsolution. Waste liquid is sent to the drain tank.

⑤ Reagent nozzle

Dispenses the reagent.

⑥ Reaction table

Location of the antigen-antibody reaction and photometry.

⑦ Mixer

Mixes the sample and the reagent.

⑧ Reagent dispensing pumpAbsorbs and flushes samples.

⑨ Sample dispensing pumpAbsorbs and flushes samples.

⑩ Sample nozzle

Dispenses samples.

⑪ Squeezing system

Raises the sample level in the sampling bottle.

⑫ Barcode reader

Reads barcodes on reagent bottles and racks.

⑬ Cell batch replacement tool

Used to replace test cells in a batch.

⑭ Reagent cover storage place

Used to store the reagent cover.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

13
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1.9 Names and Functions of Parts

1

1.9.3

Overview

2

Accessories and Others① Sample rack (light blue)② STD and QC rack (blue)

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4

Name

Prep
Functions

Function① Sample rack
② STD and QC rack

Holds sample bottles and sample cups.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

14
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2.1 Basic Screen Operation
2.2 Starting the System
2.3 Logging In
2.4 Initial Settings
2.5 Daily Operation
2.6 Inspections and Cleaning After Use
2.7 Shutting Down the System (Shut Down Mode)
2.8 Processing the Drain Tank

15
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1
Overview

Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2.1

2
Basic
Operation

Basic Screen Operation

This section describes the functions provided on the [MENU] screen, as well as the buttons on the screen
and their basic operations.

3

2.1.1 [MENU] screen and functions

AppliedOperations

On the [MENU] screen, functions (a) through (h) can be performed.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance

6[MENU] screen

Settings

AnalyzeStarts analyzing. Sets conditions to start analyzing.

Set reagent

Sets the reagent. The barcode is automatically read.
Touching {Set complete} ends the setting of the reagent.
Creates CC. Checking and editing CC are also available here.

7

Create CC

Error
Handling

Process data

Performs “Process data” or “Process quality control.”To open the [Process data] screen, a password is required (if a password was set).

Prep functions

Performs prep functions (Initialize, Prime, Cleaning).

Maintenance

Performs inspections, replacement parts check, and maintenance.

Settings

Performs “System setting” and “Protocol setting” for the system.

Close

Turns off the system. After touching this button, the system switch automatically turns off.

ID

Used to log in.
After log-in, the ID of the operator who logged in is displayed.

16
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.1 Basic Screen Operation

2.1.2

Screen Configuration and Button Operations

1
Overview

This section describes the [Buttons] and [Tabs] on the screen and how to enter settings.

Screen configuration

2

a

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4b[Assay] screen

a
b

Tabs
Buttons

Prep
FunctionscTabs are used to select functions. Tabs are provided at the top of the screen.
Buttons are used to perform processes.
At the bottom of the screen, buttons corresponding to the selected screen aredisplayed. ([Run/Cancel], [Register/Cancel], [Close], etc.)

5
Maintenance

Page 18 “■ {Continue} buttons”

cStatus bar

Displays the message and the date and time.

6
Settings

The screen is only an example.

7
Error
Handling

17
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.1 Basic Screen Operation

{Continue} buttons
A {Continue} button for close/start is provided on the Time course data range change screen, and1{Continue} for close/register is provided on the Test setting screen. In this section, the [Time course data

Overview

range change] screen and [Test setting] screen are used as examples.
[Time course data range change] screen

2When {Continue} is touched, a dialog box opens

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions↓5
Maintenance6

Dialog box

Settings{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.

7

{Discard}: Aborts the process and returns to the previous screen (in this case, the [Time course data range change] screen).

Error
Handling{Start}: Executes the process (in this case, the time course range is changed).

18
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.1 Basic Screen Operation[Test setting] screen

1

Touching the {Register/cancel} button opens a dialog box

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

↓

4
Prep
Functions5
MaintenanceDialog box

6
Settings{Cancel} : Closes the dialog box.
{Discard} : Aborts the registration of settings and returns to the previous screen. (In this case, the [Assay]
screen or [Output settings] screen.)

7{Register}: Registers the settings (in this case, the analysis items are registered.)

Error
Handling

19
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.1 Basic Screen Operation

1Entering a settingThis section describes how to enter, insert, and delete numbers.
([MENU] ｰ [Settings] ｰ [Protocol Settings] ｰ [CC Protocol])Overview

a

2
Basic
Operation

3

Numeric

AppliedOperations

keypadb4
PrepFunctions[CC Protocol] screen

Entering a numerical value

5① Touch the entry field (a). The numeric keypad opens.
② Touch the numeral buttons (b) to enter a numerical value.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}. The numeric keypad closes, and the number is entered in the entry field.
④ To cancel the entry, touch {Cancel}. The numeric keypad closes.

MaintenanceInserting one character6① Touch the entry field (a). The numeric keypad opens.
② Use {←} and {→} to move the cursor to the desired position to enter a character.

Settings

Deleting one character7① Touch the entry field (a). The numeric keypad opens.
② Use {←} and {→} to move the cursor to the desired position to enter a character.
③ Touch the {del} key.

Error
Handling

When an asterisk (*) is entered, the value of the corresponding item can be omitted.
Entering “*” is not available for some settings. Check the available range by checking the status barat the bottom of the numeric keypad.
Entering characters from the keyboard is the same as entering numbers from the numeric keypad (nextpage).
Switching between capital letters and small letters is available by touching [A/a], and entering symbols
is available by touching [Sign].

20
NN1-1741 Rev.2
Rev.1
NN1-1741

2.1 Basic Screen Operation

Radio buttons and check boxes

1

Radio buttons and check boxes are used to select one or several conditions when setting the condition Overview
items.

2
Basic
Operationc

3
AppliedOperationsd4[Samp barcode settings] screencRadio buttondCheck box

●
■

Prep
Functions

Used to select only one item.
Used to select one or more items.

5eMaintenance
Switches between capital lettersand small letters

6

Keyboard

Settings
Shifts to entering symbols

7
Error
Handling[Search word settings] screen

Entering characters① Touch the entry field (e). The keyboard opens.
② Touch the keyboard keys to enter text value.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}. The keyboard closes, and the entered value appears in the entry field.
④ To cancel the entry, touch {Cancel}. The keyboard closes.

21
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.1 Basic Screen Operation

1

Selecting from a pull-down window
A pull-down window is used to select one item from the provided list.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4[Protocol settings] screen

Prep
Functions

Inputting characters

5① Touch. The pull-down window opens as shown above.
② If the desired item is not displayed in the selection list, find the item by scrolling with
③ Touch the desired item in the selection list.
④ To cancel the entry, touch outside the pull-down window. The selection list closes.

Maintenance

and

.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

22
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.1 Basic Screen Operation

2.1.3 [Analyzing] Screen and Functions

1

When touching {Start} on the [Analyze start] screen, [Retest] screen, [QC process] screen, or [Create CC]

Overview

screen, the [Analyzing] screen opens.
The following functions can be performed from the [Analyzing] screen.
a
b

2
Basic
Operatione3cAppliedOperations

f
g

4
Prep
Functionsd5

Analyzing] screen

Maintenance

a

Title

b

Operator ID software
versioncde

Cell information
Reagent information
Rack infofSample information

Displays the test mode.
Initial test, retest analysis: TestingRetest, automatic retest: Retesting
QC test: QC testing
CC create: CC creation
The ID of the operator who is currently logged in is displayed. The system software
version is also displayed.
The cell use status is displayed.
The reagent used in the measurement is displayed.
The sample setting lane status is displayed.
When the rack is drawn in, the display changes from “Replaceable” to “Using.”
For the using lane, replacement of the rack and setting a new rack are not available.
The process status and measurement result for each sample are displayed.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

If the rack is replaced during the analysis, QC process, or CC creation, the result willg

End schedule time(min)

not be reflected.

After dispensing the last sample, the remaining time until the system stops will
be displayed.
While sample dispensing continues, the time display does not change.

23
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.1 Basic Screen Operation

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operationh3[Analyzing] screen

AppliedOperations

h4

Buttons{Connect}

Prep
Functions

When the connection with the external computer fails and communication is shut
down, {Connect}is displayed. Restart the connection by taking the following
procedure.
① Remove the cause of the connection failure.
② Touch {Connect}.
* The connection restarts, and any data which was not output is output.

5
Maintenance

When the analysis is ended using {Assay end}, transmission ends even if thereis data which was not output. In that case, specify the range of the measurement
data on the [Test data] screen.

6{Assay end}

Settings

Ends the testing.

7
Error
Handling

24
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.1 Basic Screen Operation

2.1.4 [Set reagent] Screen and Functions

1
Overview

After logging in, the [Set reagent] screen opens.
R1 reagent, R2 reagent, and sample diluent are set in the reagent refrigerator.
The reagent can be set on the {Set reagent} tab on the [Create CC] screen.

2

Be sure to remove the reagent cap before executing the test.

Basic
Operation

3aAppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5[Set reagent] screenaReagent information
Paring condition
Reagent barcode

Maintenance

Paired R1 reagent and R2 reagent are displayed in different colors.
There are three colors: blue■, purple■, and green■.
The reagent barcode can be edited manually.
When edited, the check box for “Manual input” will be selected (■). When the
check mark is removed, the barcode returns to the previous barcode.

6
Settings

Page 39 “<Entering a reagent barcode using the numeric keypad>”7

Manual input and editing are available only when the user is logged in using an

Error
Handling

administrator ID, or when the operator control is “No.”{CC detected}{No CC}

Exp. date

Test/Vol.
Lot.

When there is a CC for the reagent lot, “CC detected” is displayed.
When there is no CC, “No CC” is displayed.
Touching this button displays the CC.
When there is no CC, the test cannot be started. In that case, create a CC.

An expiration date is displayed.
When there is a sample condition error, it is displayed here (expired, volume
shortage, etc.).
The sample volume is displayed with a graphic and a numerical value.
(The displayed number of tests correspond to the use count.)
Displays the sample lot.

25
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.1 Basic Screen Operationd

1
Overview

b

2
Basic
Operation

3cAppliedOperations[Set reagent] screen

b

4
Prep
Functions

Washing solution/Purified water information
Remaining volume
Remaining volume Remaining volumes of the washing solution and purified{Reset}c

5

Buttons{Close}Maintenance{Test setting}water bottles are displayed graphically. When the sensor detects zero volume,“Empty” is displayed.
This is used after replacing the washing solution or purified water bottles.
Touch {Reset} and {Close} to reset the volume display for the bottles.
Touch this after completing the reagent setting.
The system reads the barcode and updates the statuses of the reagent
refrigerator/washing solution and purified water bottles.
Sets test items.
Page 198 “6.1.7 Data output – [Test Setting]”

6d{Menu}
Tabs

Settings

Returns to the [MENU] screen.
Moves to other screens.

If {Close} is not touched after setting a reagent or editing a barcode, the screen cannot be changed using the tabs
or buttons.

7
Error
Handling

26
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.2

Starting the System

1
Overview

Start the system by turning on the switch.
1

Check that the primary powerswitch is on.

2
Basic
Operation

If the system is not on, turn on the
primary power switch.

2

Turn on the System switch.

3* The startup screen opens.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions[Startup] screen
3

If “Exchange buffer and wash sol
to P. water” were set to “Yes” in theprevious shutdown of the system,
the message screen opens. Set thewashing solution bottle.

5
Maintenance① Remove the washing solution bottle
filled with purified water.
② Pour the washing solution into thewashing solution bottle.
③ Touch the {Close} button.

[Message] screen

6
Settings* The [LOGIN] screen opens.

7
Error
Handling[LOGIN] screen
When “Operator mode” is set to “No,” the [Set reagent] screen opens.

27
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.3

1

Logging In

Overview

To use all functions of the system, logging in is required.
After the ID information is entered on the [LOGIN] screen, the operator can log in to the system. The ID of
the operator who logged in is displayed.

2

1

Basic
Operation

Enter an operator ID.
①Touch the operator ID field.

Number of registration available: Number ofoperator IDs which can be additionallyregistered.

3
AppliedOperations{User list}: The list of registered operator IDs isdisplayed.

4[LOGIN] screen

Prep
FunctionsEntering an operator ID is also available by selecting from the {User list}.
Page 30 “■ User list”② Enter an operator ID and touch{OK} or {enter}.

5
Maintenance* The keyboard dialog closes.

6
Settings

7

2

Error
Handling

Enter a password.
① Touch the password entry field.
② Enter a password and touch{OK} or {enter}.
* The keyboard dialog closes.

28
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.3 Logging In

3Touch {LOGIN/LOGOUT}.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
4

AppliedOperations

Touch {LOGIN}.
* The user is logged in to the system. The[Set reagent] screen opens.

4
PrepFunctions{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Returns to the [MENU] screen
while keeping the current logged in/out
condition.
{LOGOUT}: Logs out. The screen returns
to the [MENU] screen.
{LOGIN}: Logs in.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

29
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.3

Logging In1

User list

On the [LOGIN] screen or “User account setting” of the System setting, selecting an operator ID from theOverview

User list is available instead of entering an operator ID.
1

2

Touch {User list}.
* The [User list] screen opens.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations[LOGIN] screen

4

2

Prep
Functions

From the displayed list, touch an
operator ID to login.

{Close}: The screen returns to the previous
screen.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

3

The operator ID is displayed.
For the procedure to enter the7

password, see page 28 “2.3 Logging In.”

Error
Handling

30
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.4

Initial Settings

1
Overview

Before using the system for the first time, initial settings are required.
The initial settings are roughly divided into “System settings” and “Protocol settings.”
For both settings, touching {Settings} on the [MENU] screen displays the corresponding screen to makeeach setting. This section describes the outline of the system settings and the protocol settings.
For detailed operating procedures, see “Chapter 6 Settings” on page 182.
When the user is logged with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” settings cannot be changed.

2.4.1

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

System Settings
1

Touch {Settings}.

4
PrepFunctions5
Maintenance2

6

Touch the button for the item to be
set.

Settings* The corresponding setting screen
opens. (See the next page.)

7
Error
Handling

31
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.4

Initial Settings

1aOverview

c
b

d

f

2

e

Basic
Operation

g
h

3

l

AppliedOperations

i

4
Prep
Functions

5aSample barcode

Set conditions for reading sample barcodes.

bcRack No. settings
ConfigRegister racks for new and former sampling bottles.

dData output

Set the date and time.
Register a password.
Select the purified water supply method and waste water drain method.
Select a data output destination.
Select formats for the printer output, external media output, and online output.
Set the online communication control.
Set the analysis items.

e

Output format

6

Select the output format.
Select items for the printer output and online output.
Set the output items and output order for external media.

Settings

7k[System settings] screen

Maintenance

Error
Handlingjf

User accountRegister, change, and delete the IDs of the operators who can log in to thesystem.

g

Language setting

Switch the system display language.

hOperatormode
Back upRestorePrint
Menu

Switch the system operator mode.

i
j
k
l

Save the system settings and protocol settings to external media.
Restore the system settings and protocol settings saved on external media.
Print the system settings.
Return to the [MENU] screen.

32
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.4 Initial Settings

2.4.2

Protocol Settings

1
1

Overview

Touch {Settings}.

2
Basic
Operation

3
2

AppliedOperations

Touch the {Protocol settings} tab.

4
PrepFunctions5
Maintenance3

Touch the button of a setting item.
* Corresponding setting screen
opens. (See the next page.)

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

33
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.4

Initial Settings

1aOverview

b

d

2
Basic
Operationc

3
AppliedOperationseProtocol Settings screen

4
Prep
FunctionsaTest item

Select the test item to be set.

b

Samp/QC protocol

Set the test conditions used when measuring samples/QC samples.

5c

CC protocol

Set the conditions used when creating a CC.

Maintenanced

Manufacturer use only Set the common conditions necessary for measuring samples, QC
samples, and STD samples (for maintenance).

e

Menu

Return to the [MENU] screen.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

34
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

1
Overview

This section describes the flow of daily operation and the operation procedures.

2.5.1

Flow of Daily Operations

2
Basic
Operation

Complete the initial setting of the system before starting operations.

Startup
Inspection
SystemPerform the startup inspection

3
AppliedOperations

Check that the primary power switch is on

startup(Normally, the primary power switch is ON.)

Start the system

Preparation

Page ix

4Page 27

Log inPage 28

Set the reagents

Page 37

Prep
Functions5

before thetest

MaintenanceSet the purified water and washing solution

Page 41

Check initial settings

Page 316(Check when the setting is changed.)

Settings

Set the printer sheets

Page 44

Set the drain tank

Page 46

Create the CC

Page 47

Set the samples

Page 58

7
Error
Handling

To the next page.

35
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

1

Daily Operations

Test start

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

Open the [Assay] screen

Page 60

Set the test conditions

Page 60

Start analyzing (Initial/Retest/QC)

Page 60

Testing<When necessary>3

Add samples

Page70

Rack information

Page 73

AppliedOperations

Test finish

Ending the analysis

Page75

4

End

Prep
Functions

Abort
Automatic stop
Inspection

5

Replace the cells

Page78and

Maintenancecleaning

Clean various sections

Pages 84 and 170

Daily

6

WeeklySettings

Monthly
System7

shutdown

Error
Handling

Shut down the system

Page 89* The System switch automatically turns off.

Process the drain tank

Page 9136
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

2.5.2

Setting the Reagent

1
Overview

R1 reagent, R2 reagent, and diluent are set in the reagent refrigerator.
A maximum of three sets of reagents can be set for one item.
Warning

2

Wear protective gears (gloves, goggles, etc.) when handling the reagents.

Basic
Operation

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection from the reagents.
Biohazard

The reagents can also be set in the {Set reagent} tab on the [Analyze] screen or [Create CC] screen.

1

3

Touch {Set reagent}.

AppliedOperations

4
Preparation before the test

Prep
Functions2

Set the reagent bottles into thereagent refrigerator.

5
Maintenance① Open the safety guard.

6
Settings

7② Open the reagent refrigerator
cover.

Error
Handling

37
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations③ Remove the cover of the reagent
bottle to be set.

1

④ Remove the reagent bottles
currently set. Set the new reagent
bottles in the proper positions.

Overview

Set R1 or R2 reagents in Pos. 1 to 6.
Set the diluent in Pos. 7 and 8.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Top view

4⑤ Set all reagents and close thereagent refrigerator cover.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

Preparation before the test

Prep
Functions⑥ Close the safety guard.

7
Error
Handling(Condition that the safety guard is
closed.)38
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

Caution1

 After setting the reagent bottles, close the reagent refrigerator cover and theOverview

safety guard.
Required

Failure to observe this precaution could result in a reagent nozzle contacting the cover.

2<Entering a reagent barcode using thenumeric keypad>① Touch {Reagent barcode}.

Basic
Operation* The numeric keypad opens.

Preparation before the test

② Check the 24-digit barcode on thereagent bottle. Enter the first 23
digits (exclude the last digit, thecheck digit) using the numeric
keypad.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}.

3
AppliedOperations* The numeric keypad closes.
* A check mark is placed in the [Manual
input] check box.

4
Prep
Functions{Reagent barcode} becomes active only when the user is logged in with an administrator ID or when the
Operator mode is set to “No.”3

5

Touch {Close}.
* The reagent barcode is automatically read.
* The reagent information is updated.
* If the reagent barcode could not be read on
the first attempt or if the reagent bottle was
not set, the reagent barcode will be readmultiple times.
This may take longer to complete thereagent set than a single successful read.

4

Check the reagent information(barcode, pairing condition, etc.)

7{Test setting}: Sets a test item.
Page 198: Returns to the [MENU]

If there is no CC for the set R1 and R2 reagents, “No CC” is displayed. In that case, create a CC.
Pairing indicates the condition in which R1 and R2 reagents in the same lot in the same test item are set as a pair.
After the reagent barcodes are read, the system automatically conducts pairing.
Do not open the reagent refrigerator cover while reading the reagent barcode. If the cover is opened, reading thebarcode fails, and an error (ERR#2-103) is output.
Expired reagents are not tested.

39
NN1-1741 Rev.3
Rev.1
NN1-1741

6
Settings

Error
Handling{CC detected}: Displays CC.

{Menu}

Maintenance2.5

Daily Operations

Request1

Reagent barcode configuration

Overview

 The barcodes on the reagent bottles are 23-digit ITFs (excluding the checkdigit).
 When entering a barcode, follow the configuration below.

2

KKKAABBCRYYMMDDXXXNNNNNM (barcode)

Basic
Operation

KKK: 3-digit manufacturer code (026)
AA: 2-digit item code (01 to 99)
90:FOBT 53:FCa

3

BB: 2-digit product code (01 to 99)

AppliedOperations

C: 1-digit bottle capacity (1: 20 mL)
R: 1-digit reagent type (1: R1 2: R2 3: diluent)YYMMDD: 6-digit expiration date (YYMMDD)

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance

6Preparation before the test

4

XXX: 3-digit lot number (000 to 999)
NNNNN: 5-digit bottle number (00001 to 99999)
M: Check digit

Switching between a reagent bottle and a diluent bottle is as follows.
 Reagent
Before the first dispensing of each sample, compare the reagent test number and the number of sample
replications. If the number of reagent tests in use is too small, a shortage is judged, and the bottle
automatically changes. The detailed conditions for the bottle change vary for each reagent lot number.
Measurement
In case of the same lot number
In case of different lot numbers
Sample (retest)

Settings

QC

The bottle changes.
The bottle changes.

CC7

The bottle does not change.

The bottle does not change.

It will not switch to a lot for which CC was not created. Set the reagent of the lot for which a CC has beencreated.
If the reagent test number becomes “0” due to trouble such as a detection failure of the reagent liquid level,
further loading of the samples stops. Instead, the measurement results for the samples for which dispensing has
completed are output.

Error
Handling

 Diluent
Bottles are switched automatically. However, if the liquid amount in a bottle becomes zero while
creating the diluent system, the detailed conditions for the bottle change depending on the reagent lot
numbers.
In case of the same lot number
The bottle changes.

In case of different lot numbers
The bottle does not change.

40
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

2.5.3

Preparing Purified Water

1
Overview

Fill the purified water bottle with purified water.

Request Always use the provided purified water bottle.

2

 Always dismount the bottle from the system, and then refill it.

Basic
Operation

 Always check that the bottle is sufficiently filled.

Preparation before the test

Purified water bottle size: 500 mL.

3
1

Loosen the purified water bottle lid(white). Remove the hose.

AppliedOperations

2

Dismount the purified water bottle
from the system.
Drain remaining purified waterfrom the bottle.

Prep
Functions

3

4

Refill the purified water bottle.

5
Maintenance4

5

Set the purified water bottle at theright-hand side (“Purified water”)
of the purified water installation
system.

6
Settings

Insert the hose into the purified
water bottle opening. Close thebottle lid.

7
Error
Handling

41
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

2.5.4

1
Overview

Preparing Washing Solution

Pour washing solution diluted to 3% into the washing solution bottle.

Request Before using the system, always check that the washing solution is sufficient.

2

 Always use the attached washing solution bottle (accessory).
 Always remove the bottle from the system before refilling the washingsolution.

Basic
Operation

3

Warning

AppliedOperations

 Wear protective gear (gloves, goggles, etc.) when handling the washingsolution.
Biohazard

4
Prep
Functions

Maintenance6
Settings

Preparation before the test

5

Washing solution bottle: 500 mL.

7
Error
Handling

1

Loosen the washing solution bottle lid(yellow) and remove the hose.

2

Dismantle the washing solution bottle
from the system.
Drain the remaining washing solution
from the bottle.

3

Dilute the washing solution to a 3%
concentration.
① Pour 15 mL of washing solution(undiluted) into the washing solution bottle.
② Pour purified water into the bottle tobring the total washing solution amount to
500 mL.

4

Set the washing solution bottle on theleft side (washing solution) of thewashing solution/purified water setting
area.

5

Insert the hose into the washingsolution bottle opening. Close thebottle lid.

Washing solution without an indication of “(undiluted solution)” is the washing solution diluted to 3%.

42
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

2.5.5

Washing Solution and Purified Water Settings

1
Overview

Set up the washing solution bottle and the purified water bottle, and update the system.
1

Touch {Set reagent} on the[MENU] screen.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Preparation before the test

2

4

Touch {Reset} for the purified
water and the washing solution.

Prep
Functions* {Reset} turns to green.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

3

Touch {Close}.
* Information on the washing solution
and purified water is updated.

7
Error
Handling

43
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

2.5.6

1
Overview

Setting Printer Sheets

Place the printer paper into the printer.

2

Paper cover

Basic
Operation

Paper cover open lever.

3
AppliedOperations

FEED button

LED lamp

4

Manual cutter

CautionPreparation before the test

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

 Pay close attention to the blade of the manual cutter.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to injuries.
Required① Raise the paper cover open lever,and open the cover.
② Set the paper roll as shown in thedrawing.
(If the roll is set upside down,
printing is not possible.)

Paper cover7③ Draw out the end of the roll from thepaper discharge port.

Error
Handling
Paper discharge port

Manual cutter
FEED button④ Bring down the paper cover.
⑤ Push down on both ends of the paper
cover to close it. Check that thecover is locked.
⑥ Press the FEED button.
⑦ Cut the sheet with the manual cutter.

44
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations



Printer LED

1
Overview

The LED on the printer indicates the printer status, including errors.

2<Normal conditions>
LED

Basic
Operation

Printer condition

Green

Stand-by, ready for printing

Blinking green

Initializing

3
AppliedOperations

Preparation before the test

<Recoverable Errors>
LED

4

Printer conditionRed

Out of paper

Blinking red

Temperature abnormal (70 ℃ or higher)

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance<Unrecoverable Errors>
LED
Blinking red and green
Blinking red and green

Printer condition
Voltage too high6
Settings

Voltage too low

7
Error
Handling

45
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

2.5.7

1
Overview

Checking the Drain Tank

(The tank connection with the system is set up by our service personnel.)
Check that the hose attached to the drain tank is connected to the system.

Warning2

 Wear protective gear (gloves, goggles, etc.) when working with the drain tank.

Basic
Operation

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection.
Biohazard

Caution3

 Before using the system, empty the drain tank.

AppliedOperations

Failure to observe this precaution could cause waste liquid to overflow.
Required Install the drain tank at a position lower than the system.
If the drain tank is installed at a position higher than the system, waste liquid may not drain

4

properly.

Preparation before the test

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

1

Connect the hose to the drain tank.

2

Check that the hose is connected tothe drain connect or at the rightside of the system.

46
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

2.5.8

Creating CC

1
Overview

When R1 reagent, R2 reagent, and sample lots are newly installed, create a CC which corresponds tothe lot.

2

Warning

Basic
Operation

 Wear protective gear (gloves, goggles, etc.) when handling the calibrator and
the QC samples.
Biohazard

3

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection.

AppliedOperations

1

Setting the STD Sample and QC Sample to the Rack

4
Preparation before the test

Request分析PrepFunctions When pouring the calibrator and the QC sample into the sample cup, check that
there are no bubbles.

前の5

When measuring the STD sample and the QC sample, use the “STD/QC rack.” Set
only the STD sample and the QC sample into the rack.
When measuring only QC, use the “QC process.”
Page 65 “2.5.12 Starting Analysis (QC Sample)”

Calibrators or each concentration

Maintenance6

Set the calibrator and the QC sample
into the STD/QC rack.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

Numbers in the figure are rack positions. The rightmost position is No.1.

47
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

2

1

Setting the STD/QC Rack into the System

Overview

1

Open the rack lane cover.

2

Set the rack into rack lane 1 or 2
with rack position No. 1 at the
inner-most side of the system.
Be careful set the rack in properly.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Preparation before the test

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance

6

When setting the rack, be careful with thefront/rear orientation. Push the rack in until
its end touches the inner section of thesystem.

3

Close the rack lane cover.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

Caution

Set the rack in the system with rack position No. 1 at the innermost end.
Failure to observe this precaution may cause problems.

Required48
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

3

Creating CC

1
1

Overview

Touch {Analyze}

2
Basic
Operation

3
2

AppliedOperations

Touch the {QC process} tab.

Preparation before the test

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance3

Touch the {Set} tab.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

49
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

4 Set each QC item.
① Select a radio button (●) for the test
item to create the CC.
② Touch {QC barcode}.
③ Read the QC barcode corresponding
to the selected test item or QC1 – 3using the handy barcode reader.
When entering a barcode using thenumeric keypad, enter the 27-digit
QC barcode excluding the last digit(check digit).
④ Max./Min. values, QC lot, andexpiration date are automaticallyentered from the barcode.
⑤ Enter the remaining settings.
(See the table on page 68.)

1

1
Overview

2

4

2
Basic
Operation
3

3
AppliedOperations

Expired QCs cannot be used.

5
Maintenance

6Preparation before the test

4
Prep
Functions

Settings

RequestAbout QC barcode configuration
 The QC barcode is a 27-digit ITF (excluding the check digit).
 When entering a barcode, follow the configuration below.
KKKAABBCYYMMDDXXXYYYYYZZZZZM (barcode)
KKK: 3-digit manufacturer code (026)
AA: 2-digit item code (01 to 99)
90:FOBT 53:FCa
BB: 2-digit product code (01 to 99)
C: Concentration typeYYMMDD: 6-digit expiration date (YYMMDD)

7

XXX: 3 digit lot number (000 to 999)

Error
Handling

YYYYY:

Min. value of reference range (00001 - 99999)

ZZZZZ: Max. value of reference range (00001 - 99999)
M: Check digit

50
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

5 Touch {Menu}.
Returns to the [MENU] screen.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

6

Touch {Create CC}.

3
AppliedOperations

Preparation before the test

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance7

Touch a radio button ● to select theitem/lot to create the CC.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

51
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

8

1
Overview

Touch {Cal. barcode} to enter thebarcode of the calibrator.
{CC detected}: Displays the currently
registered CC.

① Read the calibrator barcode with thehandy barcode reader. When entering abarcode using the numeric keypad,
enter a 17-digit calibrator barcode
excluding the last digit (check digit).

2
Basic
Operation

3② Touch {OK} or {enter}.
* The numeric keypad closes.
* The lot. and expiration date aredisplayed.

1

AppliedOperations

An expired calibrator cannot be used.
2{CC list}: Displays a list of CCs.
Page 57{Test setting}: Sets the test item.
Page 198{Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance

6Preparation before the test

4

RequestCalibrator barcode configuration
The 17-digit barcode on the bottle is an ITF (excluding the check digit).

When generating a barcode, follow the configuration below.
KKKAABBYYMMDDXXXNM (barcode)

Settings

KKK: 3-digit manufacturer code (026)
AA: 2-digit item code (01 to 99)
90:FOBT 53:FCa

7

BB: 2-digit product code (01 to 99)

Error
Handling

YYMMDD: 6-digit expiration date (YYMMDD)XXX: 3-digit lot number (000 to 999)
N: Spare (O)M: Check digit

52
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

9

Touch the {Set 1} tab to set the numberof replications for STD.
When the number of remaining cells is
smaller than the number of STD
measurement tests, a message about thecell shortage will appear.
Check the number of remaining cells before
performing the STD tests.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

Make settings other than those concerning STD replication on the {Set 1} and {Set 2} tabs as needed.

3{Set 1} tab
For details on the settings, see page 224“6.2.2 CC Protocol Setting” – {Page 1}
tab.

AppliedOperations

Preparation before the test

4
Prep
Functions5{Set 2} tab

MaintenanceFor details on the settings, see page 224“6.2.2 Protocol Settings” – {Page 2} tab.

6
Settings

7

10 Touch the {Select} tab.

Error
Handling

53
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations
11 Touch {Start}.

1* Start STD/QC measurement.
The screen shifts to the [CC create] screen.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation3. 12 Register or cancel CC.

AppliedOperations① When the test ends, the [Check CC]
screen opens.
② Check the CC.
For details on the [Check CC]
screen, see page 56 “■CC check.”

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

Preparation before the test

4

7

3

<When registering the CC >③ Touch {Continue}.
④ Touch {Register}.
The tested CC is registered in thesystem.

4

Error
Handling< When not registering the CC >③ Touch {Continue}.
④ Touch {Discard}.
Create the CC again.
Page 47 “2.5.8 Creating CC”* CC creation ends, and the screen returns to
the [CC create] screen.

In the CC protocol setting, if “Operator’s Judgment” after STD/QC test is set to “No,” the tested
CC is automatically registered in the system, and the [Check CC] screen does not open.
Page 224 “6.2.2 CC Protocol Settings”

54
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

4

Removing a Rack

1
1

Overview

After the STD/QC test ends, the screen
returns to the [Create CC] screen.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

2

Open the rack lane cover.

Preparation before the test

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance3

Remove the STD/QC rack.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

4

Close the rack lane cover.

55
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

1
Overview

CC checkIf the CC has been created, touching {CC detected} on the [Create CC] screen or the [Set reagent]
screen displays the CC information (test date and time, reagent lot, etc.) and the CC graph.

2

1

Touch {CC detected}.

2

Check the CC information and thegraph.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

5
Maintenance

6Preparation before the test

4
Prep
Functions

Settings{CC info}: Edit and recalculate the CC.
Page 128{CC list}: Display CC list.
Page 57{Print} : Print the CC information and the graph.

Turns red when the value is outside of the specified range.

3
4

Touch {Continue}.
Touch {Discard}.
* The display returns to the previous screen.

7
Error
Handling

Note

Origin values and DA values can be changed on the [Edit and Recal CC] screen.
Page 128 “3.3.8 Editing and Recalculating CC”
Note When the measurement result of the STD sample is out of the standard range, the box at theleft side of the STD-# turns red.
Page 224 “6.2.2 CC Protocol Settings”

56
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

CC listWhen {CC list} is touched on the [Create CC] screen, the [CC list] screen opens. Detailed CC

1

information can be referred from the list.
1

Overview

Touch {CC list}

2
Basic
Operation

3
2

AppliedOperations

Select the test item

Preparation before the test

FOBT uses the common CC.

3

4

Check the CC list.

Prep
Functions

Items in blue frames □ are the latest CC oreach lot.

5
Maintenance4

Touch “Lot” or “Creation date” of the
CC to check the details.
The CC with the ▶mark is theselected CC.

6
Settings{Graph}: Displays the selected CC.
{Replicate}: Displays the STD replication.
Page 118

7
Error
Handling

5

Touch {Close}.
* The display returns to the previous screen.

57
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

2.5.9

1
Overview

Setting Samples

Set the rack with the samples in the rack lane.
When racks are set in both Lanes 1 and 2, processing starts from Lane 1.

Warning2

 Wear protective gear (gloves, goggles, etc.) when handling the samples.

Basic
Operation
Biohazard

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection.

3
AppliedOperations

1

Setting samples (sampling bottles, sample cups) in the rackSet the sampling bottles vertically.


4

5
Maintenance6
Settings

Preparation before the test

Prep
Functions

If a sampling bottle is set at an angle piercing might not be conducted properly.
Up to ten sampling bottles or samplingcups can be set in one rack.

Set the sampling bottles in the rack in a way that the barcodes face the user.
Numbers in the figure are rack positions. No. 1 is on the right.

7
Error
Handling

58
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

2

Setting a sample rack in the system

1
Overview

1

Open the rack lane cover.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Preparation before the test2

Set the rack into the rack lane with rack
position No.1 at the innermost end.
Pay close attention to set the rack
properly.

4
Prep
Functions

When setting the rack, pay close attention to thefront and rear orientation of the rack. Push the rackin until the rack contacts the innermost section of
the system.

5
Maintenance3

Close the rack lane cover.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

Caution Set the rack in the system with rack position No. 1 at the innermost end.
Required

Failure to observe this precaution may cause problems.

59
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

2.5.10 Starting Analysis (Initial Test)

1

Before starting the first sample measurements, perform the initial inspection.

Overview

1

Touch {Analyze}.

2

Set each item (see the following table).

2
BasicOperation

3
AppliedOperations{Test setting}: Sets the analyzing items.

4Page 198{Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.

Prep
Functions

The changed settings are saved for eachsetting.

Test start

5
Maintenance

Item
Sample No.

Range/selection
1 - 99999

Content
The sequence No. of the first sample.

(When the system power is turned off, thesample No. returns to the “Sample start

6

No.” set in [System Settings] - [Config.])

Sample barcode

Settings

Whether or not the sample barcode is used.

(Even when the system power is turned

off, this setting is kept.)

7

Yes :
No :

The sample barcode is used.
The sample barcode is not used.
Whether or not automatic retest is performed
for error samples.
For error samples, see page 217 “6.2.1

On :
Off :

Automatic retest is performed for error samples.
Automatic retest is not performed for error
samples.
The measurement mode is selected.

Assay:Assay is selected when the test is conducted forthe first time.
Retest is selected when the sample is retested.

Auto retest

Error
Handling

This setting is also reflected in [Settings] [System Settings] - [Sample barcode settings].

(Even when the system power is turnedoff, this setting is kept.)

Sample/QC Protocol Settings.”

Measurement mode(This setting is kept until the system poweris turned off.)

Retest:
Note
Note

Retest means testing a sample that was already tested. Piercing the sample bottle is not performed
again. All of other operations will be the same as those of the “first test.”
For automatic retest, the same sample sequence number is allocated for both the first test and theretest.

60
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

3

Touch the {Start} button.
When the priming completes, dispensingof the sample starts.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4

Test start

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

61
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

2.5.11 Start Analyzing (Retest)

1
Overview

When retesting a sample, the sample is re-analyzed. Set the dilution factor for each test item andperform the test.

2

1

Touch {Analyze}.

2

Touch the {Retest} tab.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions{Test setting}: Sets the item to be analyzed.
Page 198{Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.
The settings are saved for each item.

Test start

5
Maintenance6
Settings

3

7
Error
Handling

Item
Sample No.

Set each item.

Range/selection

1 - 99999

Content
The sequence No. of the leading sample.

(When the system is turned off, thesample No. returns to the “Sample startNo.” set in [System Settings] - [Config.].)Sample barcode

Whether or not the sample barcode is used.
(The setting remains even after the system
is turned off.)

Yes:
No:

The setting is reflected to [Settings] [System Settings] - [Samp barcode settings].

Use the sample barcode.
Don’t use the sample barcode.

62
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations
Note

To return to the [MENU] screen, touch {Menu}. The display returns to the [MENU]
screen while the setting is unchanged.

1

1

4 Set the sample dilution factor.
① Touch a sample position on the rackgraphic. A dialog opens.

Overview② Set the dilution factor.
In the drawing on the left, the following dilution
factor is set.
FOBT
: Diluted by a factor of 400{▲Previous}: Selects the previous sample (moves up){▼Next}: Selects the next sample (moves down)③ Touch {Close} to close the dialog. “Dil.
retest” is displayed for samples which
the dilution factor is set.

2

3
AppliedOperations

4

3

5

Test start2
Basic
Operation

Prep
Functions

Touch {Start}.
When the pre-test priming completes,sample dispensing starts.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

63
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

1
Overview

Operation flow of the dilution retest
On the [Retest] screen, the “Dilution factor” is set. After the test starts, the sample is diluted in the cell,and the test starts.
The cell consumption is higher as compared to the regular tests.

2
Basic
Operation

Dispense
the diluted sample

3

Dispense sample

4

Mix the sample

PrepFunctions↓

Test start

Dispense R1 reagent

Maintenanceto the cells (for dilution).

↓

AppliedOperations

5

The reagent nozzle dispenses the diluent

The sample nozzle dispenses the sample

The dilution count varies
depending on the set
magnification ratio

to the cells (for dilution).

x10, x20: 1 timex100, x200, x400: 2 times

The mixer mixes the sample in the cell

One cell is used for one
dilution.

(for dilution).
The reagent nozzle dispenses R1 reagent
to the cell.

↓
Dispense
the diluted sample

The sample nozzle dispenses the diluted
sample to the cell.

↓
Mixing ①

6

The mixer mixes the liquid inside the cell.

↓

Settings

Dispense R2 reagent

7

The reagent nozzle dispenses R2 reagent
to the cell.

↓
Mixing ②

Error
Handling

The mixer mixes the liquid inside the cell.

↓
Measurement

The transmitted light is measured.

64
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

2.5.12 Starting Analysis (QC Sample)

1
Overview

When testing the QC sample only, the QC process is used.
The [QC process] is configured on two pages. Switch pages by touching the {Select} tab and the {Set}

2

tab.

Basic
Operation

If testing STD and QC at the same time, perform “CC create.”
Page 47 “2.5.8 Creating CC”

3Warning

AppliedOperations

 Wear protective gear (gloves, goggles, etc.) when handling the QC samples.
Biohazard

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection.

1

4

Touch {Analyze}.

Prep
Functions

Test start

5
Maintenance2

6

Touch the {QC process} tab.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

65
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

3 Set the QC sample.
① Select the test item to be measured (■).
The QC sample setting positions in the rackare displayed in different colors.

1
Overview{Test setting}: Sets the item to be analyzed.
Page 198{Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.
Changed settings are saved.

2
Basic
Operation

3

Note

AppliedOperations② Prepare the STD and QC racks.
③ Set the QC samples in the positions
corresponding to the colours.

4
Prep
Functions

In the case of the left figure, set the QC samples
as follow.
 FOBT for Pos. 1 - 3
 FCa for Pos. 4 - 6

Test start

5
MaintenanceItems for which R1 and R2 samples are set are displayed on the screen. If there is no item to be tested,
set the reagent of the corresponding item.
Page 37 “2.5.2 Setting the Reagent”

6

4

Settings

Touch the {Set} tab.

7
Error
Handling

66
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

1
3

2

5 Set each item.
① Select the test item.
② Touch {QC barcode}.
Enter the QC barcode that corresponds tothe selected test item or QC1-3.
For QC barcode entry, see page 50.
③ Enter the remaining settings (see the tablebelow.).

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Note

4
Prep
FunctionsPos.1 : [FOBT]-QC1
Pos.2 : [FOBT]-QC2
Pos.3 : [FOBT]-QC3
Pos.4 : [FCa]-QC1
Pos.5 : [FCa]-QC2
Pos.6 : [FCa]-QC3

Test start始

Be careful with the positions of the STD and QC racks and handlingof QC1 - 3. In the following example, set as follows.

Note
Note

5
MaintenanceSet the QC replication on the [Protocol settings] screen.
Page 217 “6.2.1 Sample/QC Protocol Settings”
If the number of remaining cells is smaller than the number of QC process tests, a message
indicating insufficient cells is displayed. Before performing the QC process, check the number ofremaining cells.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

67
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations{Set} tab1
Overview

Item
Test item

Range/selection
27 digits

Enter the QC barcode here.
The max. value/min. value, QC lot, and expiration
date are automatically set, and they can also beentered and edited manually.

QCID

0 – 9, X, Y, Z

As the tested QC1-3 ID, it is output to the external
media, printer, and the high-order system.
Can be omitted.

QC sequence No.

1 – 99999, *QC sequence No.
When a numerical value is entered for QC1 and “*”is entered for QC2-3, a serial number from the QC1value is automatically allocated every time the QC is
measured.

QC barcode

2

Content
Selects the test item to be set.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4Ex) If QC1 = 3, QC2 = *, and QC3 = *,the tested QC → QC sequence No.
QC1 → 3QC2 → 4QC3 → 5
QC1 → 6
QC2 → 7
QC3 → 8

5
Maintenance分

6
Settings

7

Test start

Prep
Functions

When numerical values are entered for each of QC13, the sequence number is allocated in a fixed way
every time QC is measured.

析Ex.) If QC1 = 3, QC2 = 10, QC3 = 15,
the tested QC → QC sequence No.
QC1 → 3QC2 → 10QC3 → 15
QC1 → 3QC2 → 10QC3 → 15

開
始

Error
Handling

SD coefficient □ SD

Note
Note

1-9

Sets
the SD coefficient used for the calculation of—
X-R control drawing for the accuracy control
process.

Expired QCs will not be analyzed.
When the QC lot is *, the expiration date, max./min. control limit values are hidden, and the corresponding
QC is not tested.

68
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

6

Open the rack lane cover.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

7

Set the rack at lane 1 or lane 2 with rack
position 1 innermost. Pay attention to set
the rack properly.

3AppliedOperations

4
Close the rack lane cover.

Test start8

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

Request When setting the rack in the lane, rack position 1 must be innermost.

7
Error
Handling

Required

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to trouble.

9

Touch {Start}.
When the pre-set priming completes,
dispensing of the sample starts.

69
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

2.5.13 Additionally Setting the Sample

1
Overview

While executing the initial analysis, the procedure to additionally setting the rack is explained.

Warning2

 Wear protective gears (gloves, goggles, etc.) when handling the samples.

Basic
Operation

Biohazard

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection.

The lane status consists of three types: “In use,” “Replace,” and “Waiting.” (See page 74.) For lanes

3

displaying something other than “In use” while testing, new setting or replacement of the rack is

AppliedOperations

possible.
However, after an “In use” rack is discharged to the rack lane, if a new rack and/or replacement isperformed while there is no rack “In use,” the test of the set rack does not start until a new test starts.
1 Check that there is a rack displaying“In use” in red in the lane
information.

4
Prep
Functions

Testing

5
Maintenance6
Settings

2

Open the rack lane cover.
In the following cases, the rack lane coveris locked; therefore, inserting a new rack
or replacement of a rack cannot be done: Initializing
 Priming before analysis
 Rack discharging from the transfer
lane to the rack lane Retest measuring
 Auto retesting QC processing CC creating*For Retest, QC test, and CC create, therack lane cover is unlocked and the rackcan be removed from the lane when alldispensing processes are completed andthe rack is discharged.

7
Error
Handling

70
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations
3

Remove the rack from the rack lane forwhich the lane information is “Replace”
or “Waiting.”
However, if no rack is set, unloading is
not necessary.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

4

Set the rack to be added to the rack lane.
Be careful to set the rack properly.
When setting the rack, put the rack in withposition 1 innermost, and push it in until therack contacts the innermost section of thesystem.
Replace the rack as quickly as possible.
Otherwise, dispensing could fail for somecells, and efficient cell use is hindered.
For lanes indicated as “In use,” do not set arack.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

Testing

5
MaintenanceRequired Set the rack in the system with rack position No. 1 at the innermost end.

6

Required

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to troubles.

5

Settings

Close the rack lane cover.
*Dispensing starts automatically.

7
Error
Handling

71
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations

2.5.14 Checking the Analysis Information

1
Overview

Checking the reagent volume
On the [Assay] screen, the [Retest] screen, the [QC process] screen, and the [Analyzing] screen,
remaining volumes of the washing solution, purified water, and regent are displayed.

2
BasicOperation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

For the diluent, washing solution, and purified water, theremaining volumes are displayed using a bottle graphic.

5
Testing

Maintenance6

For the R1 and R2 reagents, the remaining volume isdisplayed with bottle graphics. In addition, the test item,
lot number, and available test count are displayed.

Settings* On the [Set reagent] screen, only reagents for which pairing isestablished are displayed.

7

Lot.XXX : Lot numbers of R1 and R2 reagents (3 digits)

Error
Handling

XX test : Process-able test countIf an error occurs, the error information is displayed
under the bottle.
(Red)(Red) remaining volume≦5%(Yellow) remaining volume≦10%
(Red)

72
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations


Checking the rack info
Rack info is displayed on the [Assay] screen, [Retest] screen, and [Analyzing] screen. The conditionsof the sample rack and the samples in the system can be checked.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions<Sample information>

Testing

The request condition and analysis result of each sample.
Re-specification of diluting(Light blue)

5

Dilute retest is set. Displayed only on the [Retest]
screen.

Not setSample not set.

Not measured

Not measured

Maintenance(Black)6
Settings(Gray)

Measuring

Currently measuring. Displayed only on the[Analyzing] screen.

Remeasurement

Currently retesting. Displays only on the [Analyzing]
screen.

Normal

Measurement result: Negative

OR/PRC/RBC

Measurement result, OR/PRC/RBC.

Positive

Measurement result: Positive

Error

Error occurred during the measurement, and the result
was not output.

7(Green)Error
Handling(Orange)(Green)(Yellow)(Orange)(Red)

73
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations<Rack info>

1

Request condition and analysis result of Lanes 1 and 2 rack status are displayed.

Overview

Waiting(Gray)

2

The rack is not set or the state before the sample isdispensed.

Basic
Operation(Green)

Rack replacement is available

3
AppliedOperations

In use(Red)

4

Dispensing the sample

Replace

PrepFunctions(Green)Dispensing the sample on the rack completed. Rack

5
Maintenance

Testing

replacement is available.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

74
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5 Daily Operations

2.5.15 Ending the Analysis

1
Overview

When testing all of the set samples is finished, the analysis automatically ends. This section
describes other ways to finish the analysis.
2Normal ending of the analysis

Basic
Operation

After finishing the tests of all dispensed samples, the test ends.
Samples not dispensed when the normal end is selected remain as “Not measured.”.
When selecting “Abort” for the analysis, see “■ Abort analysis.”1

Touch {Assay end}.

2

Touch {Close}.

3
AppliedOperations* Results of the measured samples are printed.

4{Abort}: Ends the testing in the middle of theprocess.
{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Close}: Ends the testing.

Prep
Functions

Test finish

5
Maintenance

Abort analysis

6

The analysis is aborted.

Settings

1

Touch {Assay end}.

2

Touch {Abort}.

7
Error
Handling* Results for the samples are discarded.
{Abort}: Ends the test in the middle of theprocess.
{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Close}: Ends the test.

75
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.5

Daily Operations1

Aborting the testing
If an error occurs during testing, a popup window for aborting opens. The testing of all dispensed

Overview

samples is finished, and then the test ends.
1

2

Close the screen with {Close}.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

Resuming the test

5
Maintenance

Test finish

Only when the testing was ended or ended by aborting the sample measurement, pressing [Start] on
the [Assay] screen resumes the testing from the position after the measurement result output. When
the Start button is pressed, the following dialog box opens. Starting a new test or resuming thetesting can be selected.
1

6

Touch {Start}.

{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{New}: Begins testing from Lane 1 Position 1.
* Pierced samples will be pierced again.
{Continue}: Continues testing from the position next tothe one for which the measurement results havebeen output.
* Pierced samples are not pierced again.

Settings

7
Error
HandlingWhen a discharged rack is removed, the rack info is cleared. In that case, resuming the testing is
not possible.

When the test mode is changed before resuming, resuming the testing is not possible.

When automatic retest is set to “Yes,” resuming the testing is not possible.

76
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.5

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

2.6

Inspection and Cleaning After Use

1
Overview

2.6.1

Removing the Racks

2

The racks are removed after the testing is finished.

Basic
Operation

Warning Wear protective gear (gloves, goggles, etc.) when handling the samples.
Biohazard

3

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection.

1

AppliedOperations

Open the rack lane cover.

4

Inspection and cleaning

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance2

Remove the racks which testing isfinished.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

3

Close the rack lane cover.

77
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

2.6.2

1

Replacing Cells

Overview

The used test cells are replaced.

Warning2

 Wear protective gear (gloves, goggles, etc.) when handling the used cells.

Basic
Operation
Biohazard

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection.

3
AppliedOperations

1

Touch {Analyze}.

2

Touch the {Replace cell} tab.

4

5
Maintenance6
Settings

Inspection and cleaning

Prep
Functions

The [Replace cell] screen opens.

7
Error
Handling{Cell blank}: Displays the cell blank value of the cellwhich is currently set.
Page 83{Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.

78
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

3Open the safety guard.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

4

Remove the Light-shielding cover.

3
AppliedOperations

Inspection and cleaning4
Prep
Functions5

Remove the cell retainer.
Rotate the center handle counterclockwise
and align the ▼ mark with the unlock
mark .

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
6

Error
Handling

Remove the used cell and replace it.

<Replace one by one>
① Remove the cell and replace it with a newone.

79
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use<Replacing five cells in a batch>① Pull up the cell batch replacement tool. Allfive cells can be removed with the tool.

1
Overview② Remove the cells from the cell batch
replacement tool.

2
Basic
Operation③ Attach the cell batch replacement tool tothe system.

3
AppliedOperations④ Attach five new cells to the system.

5
Maintenance

6Inspection and cleaning4
Prep
Functions

Settings

Request When setting a test cell, check that the cell legs are not floating. After setting
the test cell, rotate the reaction table by hand. Check that the cell and thereaction chamber are not contacting. If they are contacting, an abnormalsound can be heard.
Required

After setting the test cells, if any abnormal sound occurs, immediately stop theoperation and check the test cell condition. The test cell might not be properly
set.

7

Test cell

Error
Handling

Test cell leg

Test cell leg is not
floating.

Reaction table

This can cause trouble.

Reaction chamber

80
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

7

Return the cell retainer.
Turn the center handle counterclockwise and1
Overviewalign the ▼ mark with the lock mark.

2
BasicOperation

83

Replace the Light-shielding cover.

AppliedOperations

Inspection and cleaning4
Prep
Functions95

Close the safety guard.

Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

81
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

10 Touch the replaced cells.
If all cells have been replaced, touch the{Replace all cells} button. The arrows ➨are displayed.

1
Overview* Touching the selected cell again cancels the cellselection.
* Touching {Cancel all cells} cancels selection of all thecells.
* Buttons at the lower section of the screen cannot be
operated while any cells are selected.
(Buttons become inactive.)

2
Basic
Operation3

11 Touch {Exchanged}.

AppliedOperations* The cell blank test starts.

5
Maintenance

6Inspection and cleaning4
Prep
Functions

12 Cell replacement is completed.
13 Discard the used cells.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

82
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

Checking the cell blank value

1

Testing the cells without dispensing is called cell blank testing.

Overview

This value is used for the calculation of measured data. In addition, it is also used to judge whether or
not the cells can be used without problems. This section describes the way to check the cell blankvalues.
1

2

On the [Replace cell] screen, touch{Cell blank}.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Inspection and cleaning

4
2

Check that no errors are output. The
cells with an error is displayed in red.
*Cells with an error cannot be used fortesting. If there are many error cells,
replace the cells again.

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance● 660 nm / ● 600 nm / ● 800 nm / ● 340 nm: Switches the cell blank test
wavelength.
* Usually, it is checked at 660 nm.
{Print}: Prints the test result.

6
Settings

3

7{Close} closes the Cell blank result
screen.

Error
Handling

83
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

2.6.3

1

Cleaning Various Sections

Overview

On the [MENU] screen, touching {Maintenance} opens the [Maintenance] screen.
“Inspection and cleaning” items are displayed. Follow the instructions on the screen to clean eachsection.

2
Basic
Operation

Warning3Biohazard

Wear protective gear (gloves, goggles, etc.) when cleaning the system.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection.

AppliedOperations

1

Touch {Maintenance}.

2

The [Maintenance] screen opens.

4
Inspection and cleaning

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

Clean each section.
Sections to be cleaned are as follows.
1. Touch panel (daily)
2. Rack lane (daily)
3. Washing solution and purified watersetting positions (daily)
4. Reagent cap space (daily)
5. Nozzle (weekly)
6. Rack (weekly)
7. Clean bottle/tank (monthly)7
Error
Handling

For details, see page 170 “5.1
Inspection and Maintenance”

When there is a part for which the replacement date has passed, a message
appears explaining this, with instructing to check the Parts checklist screen.

84
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

3

If the cleaning procedure is unknown,
touch each {Procedure}. The cleaning
procedure is displayed. After cleaning
completes, touch {Close} to close thecleaning procedure screen.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations{Parts checklist}: List of parts required for inspection and replacement is displayed.
Page 86 “2.6.4 Opening Parts Checklist”{Maintenance}: Adjust the system and/or checks the performance (for service personnel)

4Inspection and cleaning{Error log}: Display the error log. A maximum of 1000 error logs can be checked.

Prep
FunctionsPage 88 “2.6.5 Opening the Error Log”
{Menu}: Return to the [MENU] screen.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

85
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

2.6.4

1
Overview

Opening Parts Checklist

On the [Parts checklist] screen, part names, last replaced date, and number of months used (maximum
use count) are displayed.

2

1

Touch {Maintenance}.

2

Touch {Parts checklist}.

3

Check if there are any parts which
require replacement. Displayedcontent as the table on the next page.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4

5
Maintenance6
Settings

Inspection and cleaning

Prep
Functions

7
Error
Handling

If there are any parts or which thenumber of month or tests has
exceeded the max. value, the line
becomes yellow.

86
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

No.

Item

Content

Remarks①

Part

Name of the partMax. of 15 digits of half size

1
Overview

alphanumeric characters or 7 digitsof full size characters
Changed at②

Date when the part was replaced

2(YY/MM/DD)
Number of months

③

Basic
Operation

Number of months from thelatest replacement to thecurrent date(

AppliedOperations

Number of tests from the latest

Test

④

3

Max. number of months)

replacement to the current date(Max. number of use)

Inspection and cleaning

44

Replace the parts.

Prep
Functions① Select the part (yellow line) to be replaced.
② Replace the part.
③ Touch {Exchange}.

1* A dialog box asking “Exchange
parts?” opens.
{Exchange}: Touch this button after replacing the part.
{Print}: Print a list of parts for inspection andreplacement.
{Menu}: Return to the [MENU] screen.
{Close}: Return to the [Maintenance] screen.

2

5
Maintenance6
Settings④ Touch {Start}.
* The latest replacement date is
updated to today.
* The number of months and use countare reset to “0.”* Closes the dialog box.
{Close}: Close the dialog box.
3

{Start}: Update the parts replacement information.

Parts replacement is also available for lines not colored in yellow.

87
NN1-1741 Rev.1

7
Error
Handling

2.6 Inspection and Cleaning After Use

2.6.5

1
Overview

Opening the Error Log

On the [Error log] screen, the date and time of errors, error codes, and error names (content) aredisplayed. A maximum of 20 errors can be displayed on one screen. A maximum of 1000 errors can bedisplayed in the entire list. If there are more than 20 errors, use the scroll bar to move through the list.

2
Basic
Operation

1

Touch {Maintenance}.

2

Touch {Error log}.

3

Check the error information.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Inspection and cleaning

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling{Menu}: Return to the [MENU] screen.
{Close}: Return to the [Maintenance] screen.

88
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.7

Shutting Down the System

1
Overview

To properly shut down the system, use the “shut down mode.” The System switch turns off automatically(the primary power switch does not turn off.)
1

2

Touch {Close}.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

2

The [Close mode] screen opens.
If there are any expired items, amessage appears saying “Some parts
should be exchanged. Please check thelist of parts to exchange” is displayed.

System shutdown

Touch {Close} and then {Menu} toreturn to the [MENU] screen.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance

Page 86 “2.6.4 Opening Parts Checklist”

3

If there are no expired parts, select anoperation to be conducted at the end of
the operation.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

Item

Range/selection

Content

Exchange wash sol to P.

Yes :Replace the purified water.

water

No :

Do not replace the purified water.

Nozzle soak wash

Yes :Soak for storage.

No:

Do not soak for storage.

89
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.7 Shutting Down the System

14

Touch {Continue}.

5

Executes the Close mode.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations① Check that the purified water bottle
and the washing solution bottle are not
empty.
② Check that the “drain tank” is not full.
③ Touch {Start}.

4

5
Maintenance

System shutdown

Prep
Functions{Cancel}: Close the dialog box.
3

{Discard}: Abort the closing mode and returns to the[MENU] screen.
{Start}: Execute the Close mode.

6

6
Settings

Replace the washing solution pipe inside
the purified water bottle (when“Exchange buffer and wash sol to P.
water” is set to “Yes”).
① Remove the pipes connected to thewashing solution bottle.
② Connect the pipe in ① to thecontainer filled with purified water.

7

7

Error
Handling

The nozzle is stored with the nozzle tip
soaking (when “Yes” is selected for“Nozzle/cell soak wash”)* The System switch shuts off.
* The setting which was executed in the Closemode is saved.

8

The system power turns off.

90
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2.8

Processing the Drain Tank

1
Overview

Disconnect the hose attached to the drain tank and drain the waste liquid from inside the tank.

WarningBiohazard

2

Wear protective gear (gloves, goggles, etc.) when handling the drain tank.

Basic
Operation

Failure to observe this precaution may lead to infection.

1

3

Remove the hose from the drain tank.

AppliedOperations

4

System shutdown

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance2

Drain the waste liquid from the draintank.

6
Settings

3

Connect the hose to the drain tank.

7
Error
Handling

91
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

92
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Chapter 3 Applied Operations
3.1 Processing Test Data
3.2 Editing Sample IDs
3.3 Replication
3.4 Accuracy Control
3.5 LOG IN/LOG OUT

93
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1
Overview

Chapter 3 Applied Operations
3.1

2
Basic
Operation

Processing Test Data

On the [Process data] screen, test data can be selected, edited, and deleted.


3AppliedOperations

Test data are saved for each item.
Samples for up to 5000 tests can be saved on the hard disk for each test item. If the number of tests
exceeds 5000, the old data are overwritten.

Up to 1000 tests of the QC samples for each control can be saved on the hard disk. If the number of tests
exceeds 1,000, the old data are overwritten.

43.1.1 Opening the [Process Data] Screen

Prep
Functions

The [Process data] screen can be opened by touching {Process data} - –Process data} on the [MENU]
screen.
If a password has been set in Config., the password will be required.

5
Maintenance1

Touch {Process data}.

2

Touch {Process data}.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

94
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

2
1

If a password has been registered in[System settings] - –Config.], or if{Process data} is used for the first timewith the currently logged in account,
enter the password.

1
Overview

2

2① Touch the entry field for the password.
② Enter a password from the keyboard.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}. The dialog
closes.
④ Touch {Continue}.
⑤ Touch {Start}.

3{Cancel}{Discard}

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations: Closes the dialog box.
: Returns to the [Select dataprocessing] screen.

4
Prep
Functions
5

4

5
3

Maintenance[Process data] screen opens.

* {Samp} tab is selected.

6* The list of test date and time is displayed.

Settings

7
Error
Handling
The test date and time are when the system was started up.
If no data was processed, the date and time are not displayed.

95
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

3.1.2 Opening the [Test Data] Screen

1
Overview

The test data are selected by switching between the {Samp} and {QC} tabs on the [Process data]
screen. When {Test data} is touched after specifying the test date, the specified data is displayed. (the2[Test data] screen is different when the {Samp} tab is selected and when the {QC} tab is selected.)

Basic
Operation

The displayed date and time are the ones when the System switch is turned on (time when the system isstarted up).
The data measured until the System switch is turned off are saved on the hard disk.

3

When displaying the [Process data] screen, see page 94 “3.1.1 Opening the [Process Data] Screen.”

AppliedOperations

1

Touch the displayed test data tab.
{Samp} tab{QC} tab2

Specify the test data by date and timeor by range.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings<When specifying by the test date and time>
Touch {Date} to specify the test date.
Page 100 “3.1.3 Specifying a {Date} for the
Test Data” 2

7Error
Handling<When specifying by range>
Touch {Select-s} and specify the test date range.
Page 102 “3.1.4 Selecting {Select-s} for
Test Data” 2When {Date} or {Select-s} is not selected, all displayed test data becomes the target of data processing.
(max. 5,000 data).

96
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

3

Touch {Test data}.

{Close}{Menu}

1
Overview: Returns to the [Select dataprocessing] screen.
: Returns to the [MENU] screen.

2
Basic
Operation

3
4

AppliedOperations

The test data is displayed.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance

When the {Samp} tab is selected

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

When the {QC} tab is selected97
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

Contents displayed on the [Test data] screen
Display item

Remarks

Date

Date and time of the sample test

Rack

Rack No.- Tack Position No.

SEQ.

Sample sequence number

Sample ID

Barcode on the sample bottle

Item

Test item

Data

Test result (concentration)

3
AppliedOperations

Content

Units of test data
Units

FOBT : ng/mL
FCa : µg/g

4

Flag

-, +, 1+, 2+, 3+
Error information (excluding read errors)

Prep
Functions

UR

Under range

Comment

measured data and theflag

5
Maintenance

LOT

OR

Over range

Outputs a flag only

PRC

ProzoneOutputs a flag only

Lot of the sample used for the test
Dilution information

6
Settings

7

Outputs a blank for the

Dil

Space

No dilution (Analyze, retest)A

No dilution (retest)

A10

Dilution by a factor of 10(retest)

A20

Error
Handling

Dilution by a factor of 20(retest)

A100

Dilution by a factor of 100(retest)

A200

Dilution by a factor of 200(retest)

A400

Dilution by a factor of 400(retest)98
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

Content of the [Test data] screen (QC)
Display item

Content

Date and time

Date and time of the sample test

RACK

Rack No.- Rack Position No.

QC No.

QC No.1 - –QC lot

QC lot (3 digits)

Seq.

QC sequence No.

Item name

Test item

Measured data

Test result (concentration)

1

Remarks

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Units of test data
Units

FOBT: ng/mL
FCa: µg/g4
PrepFunctions

Error information (excluding the read errors)
Comment

QC ID

URUnder range

OR

Over range

PRC

Prozone5
Maintenance

ID of QC sample at the cursor position

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

99
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

3.1.3

1

Specifying a {Date} for the Test Data

Overview

The date of the test data to be displayed is specified on the [Process data] screen.
If a part of the year, month, and date is omitted when entering the test date, a search is conducted. The latest

2

test data that matches the entered conditions are extracted.

BasicOperation

Next page 3(Example)

If a part of the year, month, and date is omitted when entering the test date, a search is conducted. The latest
test data that matches the entered conditions are extracted.

3

1AppliedOperations

Touch the tab of the test data to be
displayed.
{Samp} tab{QC} tab4
PrepFunctions5
Maintenance2

Touch {Date}.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

100
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

3 Specify the Date.
① Touch the entry field and enter the year,
month, and date.

1

If a part of the year, month, and date isomitted, a search is conducted. The
latest test data that matches the enteredconditions are extracted.

2(Example) If October 5 is entered while omitting theyear, only data of the current year are displayed. For
example, if the current year is 2020, the displayed
data will be as follows.
2020/10/05 10:10 (displayed)
2020/10/05 10:15 (displayed)
2020/10/05 10:20 (displayed)・・・
2019/10/05 14:25 (not displayed)
2019/10/05 14:30 (not displayed)
2019/10/05 14:35 (not displayed)② Touch {Continue}.
③ Touch {Start}.
3{Cancel} : Closes the dialog box.
{Discard} : Returns to the [Select data processing]screen.
{Start}: The data is searched within thespecified date range.

4

The data of the specified test date aredisplayed.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

To re-specify the test date, touch {Clear}.
All tests are displayed. and the displayed condition returns to the condition when no range is specified.

101
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

3.1.4

1

Selecting {Select-s} for Test Data

Overview

The test data to be displayed are specified within a test date range (starting point and ending point).
The range is specified by touching test dates on the [Process data] screen or by operating the cursor

2

buttons.

Basic
Operation

When the starting point is specified and {Select-s} is touched, the test data starting point is set. Then, whenthe ending point is specified and {Select} is touched, the test data ending point is set. When the startingand ending points are finalized, the test data in-between becomes the range.

3
AppliedOperations

When opening the [Process data] screen, see “[3.1.1 Opening the [Process Data] Screen” on page 94.
When not specifying the range, all data (max. 5000) becomes the target of processing.

4

1

Prep
Functions

Touch the tab of test data to be
displayed.
{Samp} tab{QC} tab5
Maintenance6
Settings

2
1

Specify the test date of the starting
point.
① Touch the date to be used as thestarting point.

7② Touch {Select-s}.

Error
Handling
2*The test date of the starting point has
been specified. (The letters turn blue.)* When the starting point is finalized,{Select-s} changes to {Select}.

The starting and ending points can also be specified using the cursor buttons.

102
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

3

1

Specify the test date and time of theending point.
① Touch the date and time to be used as
the ending point.
② Touch {Select}.
* The test date of the end point is finalized.
* When the end point is finalized, {Select}changes to {Clear}.

2

Overview

2
Basic
Operation{Clear}: Clears the range specification.

4

1

3

The test data within the specified range
are displayed.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6

When the same dates are specified for the starting point and ending point, only one test data is
specified.



Settings

To respecify the range, touch {Clear}.
All test data are displayed, and no range is specified.

7
Error
Handling

103
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

3.1.5

1

Reading “Test Data” Not Displayed in the List (Re-reading)

Overview

The maximum number of sample data sets that can be displayed and edited in the list is 5,000.
To edit sample data not displayed in the list, it is necessary to read the data.
Specify the date to use as a starting point. Select a former date or a later date to read the data to be edited.

2

When opening the [Process data] screen, see “3.1.1 Opening the [Process Data] Screen” on page 94.

Basic
Operation

1{Samp} tab is displayed.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions2

51

Maintenance2

6

The test data is read by specifying thestarting point.
① Touch the test date and time to be used as astarting point.
(Selecting is also possible using the
cursor buttons at the bottom right of thescreen.)② Touch {Read again}.
③ Select the reading method (see thefollowing table).
④ Touch {Start}.

Settings* Starts reading the test data.
{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.

7
Error
Handling
4

Select● Get data before the date on the cursor.

● Get new data after the date on the

cursor.

{Close}: Returns to the [Select data processing] screen.
Or returns to the [Analyzing] screen.
(When the {Test data} button istouched on the AssayMainView screen){Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.

Content

The data is acquired before the date of the cursor
position (date and time at the cursor position are notincluded).
Reads the data before the date and time of the
cursor position (date and time at the cursor
position are not included).

104
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

3.1.6

Reading “Test Data” in External Media (Switching the External Media)

1
Overview

Test data saved on external media can be read and displayed on the screen. This is not possible for QC
sample test data.

2

When displaying the [Process data] screen, see “3.1.1 Opening the [Process Data] Screen” on page 94

1

Basic
Operation

Touch the {Samp} tab.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions2

Touch {Media}.

5{Media} changes to {HD change}.

Maintenance* The data is read from the external media.
* The test data saved on the external media
are displayed (max. 5000).

6* The data are displayed from the latest
date back.

Settings

7
Error
Handling{HD change}: Returns to the display of test data
saved on the system hard disk.

105
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

3.1.7

1

Searching the Test Data

Overview

The test data can be searched by Sample ID, Sample sequence No., Rack No., and test date.

2

The test data cannot be searched by rack position No.
When displaying the [Process data] screen, see “3.1.1 Opening the [Process Data] Screen” on page 94.

Basic
Operation

1

3

Touch the test data tab to be displayed.
{Samp} tab{QC} tabAppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

2

Specify the test data by test date or
range.

<When specifying by test date>5

Touch {Date} to specify the test date.

Maintenance

Page 100 “3.1.3 Specifying a {Date}for the Test Data” 2

6<When specifying by range>

Settings

Touch {Select-s} to specify the test
date range.
Page 102 “3.1.4 Selecting {Select-s}
for Test Data” 2

7

3

Error
Handling

Touch {Test data}.

106
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

4

1

Search the target sample.
① Touch the corresponding tab.
② Touch [Search].

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation2

5

Select a keyword type to be searched.
□

Samp ID (only for the {Samp} tab)□Samp No.

□

Rack No.

□

Date

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions61Enter a keyword.
① Touch the entry field next to a keyword.

2

5
Maintenance② Enter a value using the keyboard.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}.

6{A/a} : Switches between large/small letters.

Settings{Sign}: Enters symbols.
3

7

When the test date is selected, the year, month, date, hour, or minute must be entered.

7

The search condition has been entered in
an entry field.

107
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Error
Handling

3.1 Processing Test Data

1

8

Touch {Continue}.

9

Touch {Start}.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation3* Searching starts.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance

10 The search results are displayed.

6
Settings{Search}: Continues searching.

7
Error
Handling

108
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

3.1.8

Outputting Test Data

1
Overview

The specified test data is output to the selected destination.

Prints the test data

Saves the test data on external media.



Outputs the test data to the host computer.

2
BasicOperation

1

Touch the tab for the test data to be
output (printed).

3{Samp} tab

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

2

Specify the test data by date or range.

5<When specifying by test date>Touch {Date} to specify the test date.

Maintenance

Page 100 “3.1.3 Specifying a {Date} forthe Test Data” 2<When specifying by range>

6

Touch {Select-s} to specify the test date
range.

Settings

Page 102 “3.1.4 Selecting {Select-s} for
Test Data” 2

3

7

Touch {Test data}.

Error
Handling

109
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

4

1

Specify the output range.
The procedure is the same as for the screen
for selecting data.
Page 102 “3.1.4 Selecting {Selects} for Test Data” 2

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

5

Touch {Output}.

6

Outputs the test data.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance① Select the destination.

6
Settings○

Printer○Ext. media○

Online② Touch {Start}.
2
1

7{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.

Error
Handling
If an error occurs in the test result communication, selecting “Network” in the [Select media] dialog is unavailable.

Request

If the external media becomes full in the course of outputting the data,replace it with another external media and touch {Retry}.

Required110
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.1 Processing Test Data

* During output, the [Output] dialog opens.
* When the output completes, the [Output] dialog
closes.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

111
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.2

1

Editing a Sample ID

Overview

The sample ID of the data selected on the [Test data] screen can be edited.
In [System Settings] - –Samp barcode settings] screen - –Sample barcode], if [Duplicated check] is set to “YES,” a2

redundancy check on the Sample IDs is conducted.

BasicOperation

However, if the sample ID of Retest data is edited, the redundancy check is not conducted.

3

1

Touch the {Samp} tab.

2

Specify the test data by date or range.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

5<When specifying by test date>

Maintenance

Touch {Date} to specify the test date.
Page 100 “3.1.3 Specifying a{Date} for the Test Data” 2

6<When specifying by range>

Settings

Touch {Select-s} to specify the test date
range.
Page 102 “3.1.4 Selecting {Selects} for Test Data” 2

7Error
Handling

3

Touch {Test data}.

112
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.2 Editing a Sample ID

4
1

Select a sample ID.
① Touch the sample ID to be edited.
(The sample ID can also be selectedalso by moving the cursor with the
buttons.).
② Touch {ID edit}.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation
2

3

When the cursor is on a sample ID with 16 or more digits in the 2D code, the ID edit function becomes
unavailable.
([ID edit] becomes inactive.)

5

AppliedOperations

Enter a sample ID.

4① Touch the entry field for the sample ID.
The Samp ID dialog opens.

1
2

Prep
Functions② Enter a sample ID using the keyboard.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}.
{A/a}{Sign}

5: Switches between large/small letters.
: Enter symbols.

Maintenance

3

6

6

Update the sample ID.

Settings① Touch {Continue}.

7
Error
Handling② Touch {Start} on the dialog box.
* The edited sample ID is recorded.
1{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
2

{Discard}: Aborts editing of the sample ID, and returns
to the [Test data] screen.

113
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3

1

Replication

Overview

The replication data of the test data specified on the [Test data] screen is displayed.

2

3.3.1 Displaying the [Sample Replication] Screen (Sample)

Basic
Operation

The replication data of the sample is displayed.

3
AppliedOperations

If the range is not specified or the item is not selected, all data are displayed.

1

Touch the {Samp} tab.

2

Specify the test data by date or range.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings<When specifying by test date>Touch {Date} to specify the test date.
Page 100 “3.1.3 Specifying a {Date} for the
Test Data” 2

7Error
Handling<When specifying by range>
Touch {Select-s} to specify the test date range.
Page 102 “3.1.4 Selecting {Select-s} for
Test Data” 2114
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

3

Touch {Test data}.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

4
1

Specify the test data within the test date
range.
① Touch the test date of the starting
point (the cursor buttons at the bottom
right of the screen can also be used).
② Touch {Select-s}.

2* The line of the specified date changes toblue (starting point)3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions* {Select-s} changes to {Select}.

③ Touch the test date of the ending point(the cursor buttons at the bottom rightof the screen can also be used).

5
Maintenance* The lines of the specified range changes toblue (ending point).

6④ Touch {Select}.

3

Settings* The data in the specified range isdisplayed.
4* When the ending point is finalized,{Select} changes to {Clear}.
{Select-s}: Finalizes the starting point data for range
specification.
{Select}: Finalizes the ending point data for range
specification.
{Clear}: Clears the specified range.

115
NN1-1741 Rev.1

7
Error
Handling

3.3 Replication

5

1
Overview

Select an item of test data.
① Touch {Select item}.
The item select dialog is displayed.
② Select an item on the dialog.

2③ Touch {OK}.

1

Basic
Operation* {Select item} changes to {Cancel}.
{Cancel}: Clears the range specification and item
selection.

3

2

AppliedOperations
3

6

Touch the {Replicate} tab.

7

The [Replicate (sample)] screen
opens.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling{Time course}: Displays the time course data.
Page 131 “3.3.9 Displaying and Printing Time Course (Sample)”{Search}: Searches the sample by the sample ID, sample No., rack No., and test date.
Page 126 “3.3.7 Searching Replication Data”

116
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

Content of the [Replicate] screen
Display item

Content

Date

Date and time of the sample test

Rack

Rack No.- Rack Position No.

SEQ.

Sample sequence No.

Sample ID

Barcode on the sample bottle

Item

Test item

Data

Test result (concentration)

Units

Units of measured data
FOBT: ng/mL
FCa: µg/g

Flag-, +, 1+, 2+, 3+1

Remarks

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4

Error information (excluding read errors)

Comment

LOT

UR

Under range

OR

Over range

PRC

ProzonePrep
Functions

Outputs a blank for themeasured data and theflag (displayed for
dilution retest)

5

Outputs a flag only

MaintenanceOutputs a flag only

Lot of the sample used for the test.
Dilution information

Dil

Space

No dilution (analyze, retest)A

No dilution (retest)

A10

Dilution by a factor of 10(retest)
Dilution by a factor of 20(retest)
Dilution by a factor of 100(retest)
Dilution by a factor of 200(retest)
Dilution by a factor of 400(retest)

A20
A100
A200
A400

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

117
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

3.3.2 Displaying [Replicate (STD)] Screen

1
Overview

STD replication data is displayed.

2

1

Touch {Create CC}.

2Touch {CC list}.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4* The [CC list] screen opens.

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance3

6

Select CC.

1① Select an item.

Settings② Touch the lot or creation date of the
CC to be edited or recalculated.
2

7*The selected CC is indicated by the ▶ mark.

Error
Handling

4

Touch {Replicate}.

118
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

4

Data of the selected CC are displayed.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Content of the [Replicate (STD)] screen
Display item

Content

Date

Date and time when STD was

Remarks4

measured
Rack

Rack No.- Rack Position(Blank)STD concentration (STD-1 - STD-6)

DA1

ABS (A#) change amount A3-A1

DA2

ABS (A#) change amount A2-A0

DA1 comment

DA1 comment

DA2 comment

DA2 comment

Prep
Functions5Page 236 “1.2 DA Value

MaintenanceCalculation”

6
Settings{Save to media}: Saves the replicate data to an external media.

7

Page 120 “3.3.3 Saving Replicate Data (STD) to External Media”

Error
Handling{Time course}: Opens the [Time course data] screen.
Page 132 “3.3.10 Displaying and Printing Time Course (STD)”
Page 135 “3.3.12 Changing the Time Course Range (STD)”{Close}: Returns to the [Select data] screen.

NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.5

119

3.3 Replication

3.3.3

1

Saving Replication Data (STD) to External Media

Overview

By opening the [Replicate (STD)] screen, the replication data displayed on the screen can be saved toexternal media.

2

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [Replicate (STD)] screen is displayed.

Basic
Operation

Page 118 “3.3.2 Displaying [Replicate (STD)] Screen”

1

3
AppliedOperations

On the [Replicate (STD)] screen, touchthe {Save data} button.
* The STD replication data is saved on theexternal media.

4
Prep
Functions5
MaintenanceIf external media is not connected, the “External media is not connected” message will be displayed. Connect
external media and touch {Retry}.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

120
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

3.3.4 Displaying the [Replicate (QC)] Screen

1
Overview

The QC replication data is displayed.
If a range is not specified, all data are displayed on the screen.

2
1

Basic
Operation

Touch the {QC} tab.

3
AppliedOperations

4
2

Specify the test data by date or range.
<When specifying by test date>

Prep
Functions

Touch {Date} to specify the test date.
Page 100 “3.1.3 Specifying a {Date} forthe Test Data” 2

5Maintenance<When specifying by range>
Touch {Select-s} to specify the test date range.
Page 102 “Selecting {Select-s} for Test
Data” 2

6
Settings

3

Touch {Test data}.

7
Error
Handling

121
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

4

Touch the {Replicate} tab.

5

The [Replicate (QC)] screen is displayed.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3* QC IDs are displayed.

AppliedOperations{Close} : Returns to the process data start screen.

4
Prep
Functions5
MaintenanceContent of the [Replicate (QC)] screen

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

Display item

Content

Date

Date and time when QC was measured

Rack

Rack No.- Rack Position No.

QC no.
QC lot
SEQ.
Item
DATA
Units

QC sample No.
QC sample lot number
QC sequence number
Test item
QC sample measured data
Units of measured data
FOBT: ng/mL
FCa: µg/g
Barcode read error
QC ID of the QC sample at the cursor position

Comment
QC ID

Remarks

When the QCID has 16 or more digits of 2D code, only 15 digits from the beginning are displayed.

{Time course} : Displays the time course data.
Page 131 “3.3.9 Displaying and Printing a Time Course (Sample)”{Search} : Searches the sample by the sample ID, sample No., rack No., and test date.
Page 126 “3.3.7 Searching Replication Data”

122
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

3.3.5

Specifying {Select-s} for Replication Data

1
Overview

The replication data can be specified within a test date range (from starting point to ending point) by
touching the test date or by operating the cursor buttons on the [Replicate] screen.

2

Specifying the starting point and touching {Select-s} sets the replication data starting point.

Basic
Operation

When the ending point is specified and {Select} is touched, the replication data ending point is set.
When both starting point and ending point are finalized, the replication data between the starting andending points are specified.

3
AppliedOperations

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [Replicate] screen is displayed.
Page 114 “3.3.1 Displaying the [Sample Replication] Screen (Sample)”

1
1

1

-

5

Specify the replication data starting point.
① Touch the date and time to be used as astarting point.
② Touch {Select-s}.
* The starting point is set. (The line of specified
date turns blue.)* When the starting point is set, {Select-s}changes to {Select}.

4
PrepFunctions5
Maintenance2

62

Specify the replication data ending point.

Settings① Touch the date and time to be used as an
ending point.
* The line of the specified range turns blue.

7② Touch {Select}.
1* The data of the specified range is displayed.
* When the ending point is specified, {Select}changes to {Clear}.

Error
Handling

2{Select-s}: Finalizes the starting point of the range
specification.
{Select}: Finalizes the ending point of the range
specification.
{Clear}: Clears the specified range.

123
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

When the dates and times specified as the starting point and ending point are the same, only one test data set is1

specified.

Overview

To redo the specification of the replication data range, touch {Clear}. All replication data are displayed, and norange is specified.

2

3

Basic
Operation

The replication data is specified.
* The specified replication data is displayed.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

124
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication}

1

To further limit the test items to be processed on the [Replicate] screen, select an item.

Overview

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [Replicate] screen is displayed.
Page 114 “3.3.1 Displaying the [Sample Replication] Screen (Sample)”

1 -

5

2
1

Basic
Operation

Touch {Select item}. The item
selection dialog opens.

3
AppliedOperations2
1

4

Select a test item.

Prep
Functions① Select an item in the dialog.
② Touch {OK}.

5

2

Maintenance3

The selected item data are displayed.
* {Select item} changes to {Cancel}.

6
Settings{Cancel}7: Clears the range specification anditem selection.

Error
Handling

125
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

3.3.7

1
Overview

Searching Replication Data

The replication data can be searched by sample ID, sample number, rack number, and test date.
The explanation starts from the condition at which the [Replicate] screen is displayed.
Page 114 “3.3.1 Displaying the [Sample Replication] Screen (Sample)” 1

2- 5

When a range is not specified, all error samples do not become the target of the error sample search.

Basic
Operation

The replication data cannot be searched by rack position number.
The replication data range can also be specified by {Select-s} on the [Replicate] screen. The procedure is thesame as “3.3.5 Specifying {Select-s} for Replication Data” on page 123.

3
AppliedOperations

1

Touch {Search}.

2

Select the keyword to be searched.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance

6□

Samp ID (only for the {Samp} tab)□Samp No.

□

Rack No.

□

Date

Settings

7
Error
Handling

3

1Enter a value.
① Touch inside the “entry field” next
to a keyword.

2② Enter a value using the keyboard.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}.
{A/a}: Switches between large/small letters.
3{Sign}: Used to enter symbols.

126
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication
If “Test date” is selected, the year, month, day, hour, or minute must be entered.

1

The search range is the range specified on the [Test data] screen.

4

A search condition is entered in theentry field.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
5

AppliedOperations

Touch {Continue}.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6

Touch {Start}.
* The search starts.

6
Settings

7
7

Error
Handling

The search results are displayed.

127
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

3.3.8

1

Editing and Recalculating CC

Overview

Recalculation of CC origin value and DA value by editing and saving the recalculated CC in the hard discare available.

2

While logging in with an administrator ID or when “NO” is set to Operator mode, editing and recalculation are

Basic
Operation

available.
The explanation starts from the condition which the [CC list] screen is displayed.
Page 57 “■ CC list”

3
AppliedOperations

1

1

Select CC.
① Select an item.
② Touch the lot or creation date of the CC
to be edited/recalculated.

2

4* The selected CC is indicated by the ▶ mark.

PrepFunctions2

Touch {Graph}.

3

Touch {CC info}.

3

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

128
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

4
1

Edit CC.
① Touch the entry field of the item to beedited.
The keyboard is displayed.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation
The DA1 values of STD-1 - –TD-5 should be entered in DA fields.
The DA values of STD-6 are the entered value of DA1 for the upper level and the entered value of DA2
for the lower level.
DA2 for STD-6 is referred to for the PRC method check.
Page 238 “1.4 Prozone Check”

3
AppliedOperations② Enter a number.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}.

4
Prep
Functions2

5
Maintenance3

5

Touch {Recal}.

6
Settings* The recalculated CC will be displayed.

7
Error
Handling

129
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

1

6

Touch {Continue}.

7

Touch {Register}.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations* The CC is registered as the latest CC.

{Register}: Registers the CC data.

4{Discard}: Aborts registration and returns to the[Check CC] screen.

Prep
Functions{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

130
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

3.3.9

Displaying and Printing a Time Course (Sample)

1
Overview

The time course of the replication data (sample) can be displayed. On the screen, the time course (graph),the number of cycles (Cycle), and the absorbance (ABS) are displayed.

2

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [Replicate] screen is displayed.
Page 114 「3.3.1 Displaying the [Sample Replication] Screen (Sample)” 1

1
1

Basic
Operation- 3

Display the time course.
① Touch the date field.

3* The specified data is encircled by a blue frame.

AppliedOperations② Touch {Time course}* The time course of the specified data isdisplayed.

4
Prep
Functions225

The time course is displayed.

Maintenance

When printing the time course, touch{Print}.

6{Print} : Prints the time course.

Settings{Range change} : Changes the time course range.
{Close}: Returns to the [Replicate] screen.

7
Error
Handling
The “▼” mark on the screen can be moved by the cursor buttons.
The numeral information of the cursor is displayed in
Each item indicates the following meanings.

# Cycle

#ABS

↑

↑

a

b

a:
b:

Number of cycles
ABS (Test value – Cell blank value)131
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

3.3.10 Displaying and Printing a Time Course (STD)

1
Overview

The time course of the replicate data can be displayed.
On the screen, the time course (graph), the number of cycles (Cycles), and the absorbance (ABS) are2

displayed.

Basic
Operation

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [Replicate (STD)] screen is displayed.
Page 118 “3.3.2 Displaying [Replicate (STD)] Screen”

3

1

AppliedOperations

Touch {Time course}.
* The time course of the specified data isdisplayed.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance2

The time course was displayed.

When printing the time course, touch {Print}.

6{Print} : Prints the time course.

Settings{Range change} : Changes the time course range.
{Close}: Returns to the [Replicate] screen.

7
Error
Handling

The “▼” mark on the screen can be moved by the cursor buttons.
The numeral information of the cursor is displayed in
Each item indicates the following meanings.

# Cycle

#ABS

↑

↑

a

b

a:
b:

Number of cycles
ABS (Test value – Cell blank value)132
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

3.3.11 Changing the Time Course Range (Sample)

1
Overview

On the [Time course data range change] screen, the range can be changed by entering “Max Value” and“Min Value.”2

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [Replicate] screen is displayed.
Page 114 “3.3.1 Displaying the [Sample Replication] Screen (Sample)”

1

Basic
Operation- 3

3

The time course data for which the range was changed is not saved to the hard disk.

AppliedOperations

1 Display the time course.
① Touch a Date field.

1* The specified data is encircled by a blue frame.

4
Prep
Functions② Touch {Time course}.
* The time course of the specified data isdisplayed.

5

2

Maintenance2

Touch {Range change}.

6
Settings

7{Print}Error
Handling: Prints the time course.

{Range change}: Changes the time course range.
{Close}: Returns to the [Replicate] screen.

133
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

1

3 Set ABS.
(Available range: 0 - –0000)

1

Overview① Touch the entry field of [Max Value]or [Min Value]. The numeric keypad
opens.
② Enter a number.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}.

2

2
Basic
Operation

3

3

AppliedOperations

4

Touch {Continue}.

5

Touch {Start}.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance* The range changes.
{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.

6

{Discard}: Aborts the range change and returns to
the [Time course data] screen.

Settings{Start}: Changes the range.

7
Error
Handling

6

The time course after the range change
has been displayed.

{Print}: Prints the time course. If {Close} istouched during printing, the printing isaborted.
{Close}: Returns to the [Replicate] screen.

134
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

3.3.12 Changing the Time Course Range (STD)

1
On the [Time course data range change] screen, the range is changed by entering the “Max Value” and theOverview“Min Value.”
The explanation starts from the condition at which the [Replicate (STD)] screen is displayed.

2Page 118 “3.3.2 Displaying [Replicate (STD)] Screen”

Basic
Operation

The time course data for which the range was changed will not be saved to the hard disk.

1

Display the time course.
① Touch a Date.
* The specified data is enclosed by a blue
frame.

② Touch {Time course}.
* The time course of the specified data isdisplayed.

2

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

Touch {Range change}.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

3
1

Set ABS.

7(Available range: 0 - –0000)

Error
Handling① Touch the entry field for [MaxValue] or [Min Value]. The
numeric keypad opens.

2② Enter a number.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}.
3

135
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.3 Replication

1

4

Touch {Continue}.

5

Touch {Start}.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts the range change andPrepFunctions

returns to the [Time course data] screen.
{Start}: Changes the range.

5
Maintenance6

The time course after the range change
has been displayed.

6
Settings{Print} : Prints the time course. While printing,touching {Close} aborts printing.
{Close}: Returns to the [Replicate (STD)] screen.

7
Error
Handling

136
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

3.4

Accuracy Control

1
Overview̶On the accuracy control screen, QC lot select, Intra-day/Inter-day, and X-R control are displayed.
̶

In addition, the Intra-day/Inter-day and X-R control range can be edited.

3.4.1

2

Displaying the QC Lot List ([QC lot select] screen)

Basic
Operation

Touching {Process data} - –Process QC} on the [MENU] screen or touching {Process QC} tab on the[Analyzing] screen will display the QC lot select ([QC lot select] screen).

3
AppliedOperations(Required to select a test item and to operate the {Start} button)—

On this screen, the {Intra-day/Inter-day} tab and the {X-R control} tab are provided in addition to the {QC4

lot select} tab.

PrepFunctions

When there is no test data, switching from the {QC lot select} tab to another tab is not available.

1

Touch {Process data}.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

2

Touch {Process QC}.

7
Error
Handling

137
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

3

1

Select a test item.
① Select a radio button (●).

Overview② Touch {OK}.

2{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.

Basic
Operation

1

3

2

4

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

The [QC lot select] screen opens.
{QC lot select} tab{Intra-day/Inter-day} tab{X-R control} tab—* The currently used QC lots are displayed
sequentially.
(The display order is from left to right andfrom top to bottom.)5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

138
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control
a

b

c

1
Overview

d
e

2
Basic
Operationf3
AppliedOperations

h

g

作

4

[Screen]: QC lot select screen

Prep
Functionsa

QC lot selectDisplays the QC lots saved in QC1 - –C3.

b

Intra-day/Inter-day

Displays the specified QC# and the intra-day/inter-day data of the lot.

5
Maintenance

—

—

c

X-R control

Displays the X-R control of the intra-day/inter-day data.

d

QC

Selects a QC# for the displayed QC lot.

e

QC lotDisplays the QC lot of the selected QC#.
Selects the QC lot to be used.

6
Settingsf

MonSpecifies the QC lot to be used in units of months. Enter the number ofmonths to process the data.

gDel

Deletes the selected QC lot.

7

Registers the changed data.

Error
HandlinghContinue139
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

3.4.2

1

Selecting a QC Lot

Overview

When the [QC lot select] screen is opened, a list of QC lots is displayed. The QC No. and QC lot selected—in this list are the target data to be processed on the {Intra-day/Inter-day} tab and the {X-R control} tab.
Page 142 “3.4.4 Opening the [Intra-day/Inter-day] Screen”

2—

Page 151 “3.4.8 Displaying X-R Control”

Basic
Operation

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [QC lot select] screen is displayed.
Page 137 “3.4.1 Displaying the QC Lot List ([QC lot select] screen))”1

3

Touch QC No. (QC1 - –C3)
* The currently used QC lots are displayed
sequentially.
(The display order is from left to right andfrom top to bottom.)AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions2

Touch a QC lot (selecting is alsoavailable using the cursor keys).

3Enter the number of months of data toprocess. (For an example entry,
see
.)

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7

1

Error
Handling① Touch the entry field.
② Enter a number using the numeric
keypad.

2③ Touch {OK} or {enter}.
3

In the QC lot list, the data of the latest month to the specified number of months are displayed (1 to 36 months in units ofmonths).
(Example 1) When “one month” is entered on the current date of June 15, the data from June 1 to June 15 are displayed.
(Example 2) When “three months” is entered on the current date of June 15, the data from April 1 to June 15 are displayed.

140
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

3.4.3

Deleting a QC Lot

1
Overview

The QC No. - –C lot selected in “3.4.2 Selecting a QC Lot” can be deleted.
After the QC lot to be deleted is selected, touch {Continue} and touch {Start} in the dialog box.
When the data for the selected QC No. - –C lot is deleted, the hard disk is updated.

2* If {Start} is not touched, the hard disk is not updated.

Basic
Operation

The explanation starts from the condition at which operation 2

in “3.4.2 Selecting the QC Lot” iscompleted.

3

Page 140 “3.4.2 Selecting a QC Lot”

1

AppliedOperations

Touch {Del}.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance2

Touch {OK}.
* The data in memory is updated.

6
Settings[Close]: Aborts deletion of the QC lot.

7
Error
Handling

3

Save the updated data.
① Touch {Continue}.
② Touch {Register}.
* The updated data is saved on the hard
disk.

{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Returns to the [Select data processing]screen.

141
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

3.4.4 Opening the [Intra-day/Inter-day] Screen

1
Overview

When the {Intra-day/Inter-day} tab is touched on the [QC lot select] screen, the [Intra-day/Inter-day] screen
opens. On this screen, the intra-day/inter-day data of the QC No. - –C lot specified on the [QC lot select]2

screen is displayed.

Basic
Operation

If there is no test data, changing from the [QC lot select] tab to another tab is not available.

3

1

Touch {Process data}.

2

Touch {Process QC}.

3

Select the test item.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling① Select the radio button for thecorresponding item (●).
② Touch {OK}.
1{Close}: Returns to the previous screen.

2

142
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

4

The [QC lot select] screen opens.
* The currently used QC lots are
displayed sequentially.
(The display order is from left to rightand from top to bottom.)1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

5

The QC and QC lot have been
selected.

3
AppliedOperations

Page 140 “3.4.2 Selecting a QC Lot”

4
Prep
Functions5
6

Maintenance

Touch the {Intra-day/Inter-day} tab.
* The [Intra-day/Inter-day] screen opens.
(See the next page.)

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

143
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Controlb1Overview

a

2
Basic
Operationc3dAppliedOperations

g

4

j

e

Prep
Functionsfhi[Screen]: Intra-day/Inter-day data

5
Maintenancea

QC

Displays the QC (QC1 - –C3) specified on the [QC lot select] screen.

b

QC lotDisplays the QC lot specified on the [QC lot select] screen.

c

QC data

When the intra-day data is selected
Displays the test date and average value of the specified QC and QC lot.
When the inter-day data is selected(Date, Value)

6

Displays the test time and average value of the specified QC and QC lot.

Settings

7dInter-day

Displays the inter-day data (Test date, Value).

eIntra-day

Displays the intra-day data (Test date, Value).

f{Select-s}

Specifies the range of intra-day data or inter-day data.

Error
Handling

The data range can also be specified using the cursor buttons.

g

{Del}

Deletes the specified intra-day or inter-day data.

h{Edit}

Edits the intra-day or inter-day data.

i{Output}

Outputs the intra-day or inter-day data (printer, external media)

j{Continue}

Registers the edited intra-day or inter-day data on the hard disk.
Displays the data [registration check] screen. Touch {Register}.

144
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

3.4.5

Editing (Recalculating) Intra-Day and Inter-Day Data

1

When the {Intra-day/Inter-day} tab is touched on the [QC lot select] screen, the [Intra-day/Inter-day]screen opens. On this screen, the intra-day or inter-day data of the specified QC No.-QC lot is displayed.
The radio buttons are used to switch between the intra-day and inter-day data.

Overview

2

Intra-day data: Edit the intra-day data.
Inter-day data: Edit the replication data.

Basic
Operation

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [QC lot select] screen is switched to the [Intraday/Inter-day] screen.
* The QC lot has already been selected on the [QC lot select] screen.

3
AppliedOperations

Page 142 “3.4.4 Opening the [Intra-day/Inter-day] Screen”
When there is no test data, switching from the {QC lot select] }ab to another tab is not available.
The maximum number of tests available for a day with one QC# and QC lot is ten.
The results of the 11th and later tests are not saved even if they are conducted.
When the user is logged with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” editing ispossible.

1○○

Select the data to be edited.
Intra-day data
Inter-day data4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

2

Touch {Edit}.

7
Error
Handling

145
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

3

1

1

Overview

2

Edit the intra-day data (or inter-daydata).
① Touch an entry field.
② Enter a number using the numeric
keypad.
③ Touch the [OK] or [enter] button.

2

Basic
Operation

3

3

4

AppliedOperations

4

Touch {Recal}.

{Cancel}: Aborts the editing of the intra-day orinter-day data. Returns to the [Intraday/Inter-day] screen.

Prep
Functions55

Maintenance

Touch {Continue}.
* The new average value is displayed.

6
Settings

7

6

Error
Handling

Touch {Register}.
* The recalculated result is registered.

{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Returns to the [Select data processing]screen.

146
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

3.4.6

Deleting Intra-Day and Inter-Day Data

1
Overview

The intra-day or inter-day data can be deleted by specifying a data range on the [Intra-day/Inter-day] screen.
After deletion, the specified data will no longer be displayed on the screen. However, the hard disk data is2

not updated until {Register} is touched.
The explanation starts from the condition at which the [QC lot select] screen is switched to the [Intra-

Basic
Operation

day/Inter-day] screen.
* The QC lot has been selected as the [QC lot select] screen.

3

Page 142 “3.4.4 Opening the [Intra-day/Inter-day] Screen”

AppliedOperations

When there is no test data, switching from the [QC lot select] tab to another tab is not available.

1

4

Select the data to be edited.
○
Intra-day data○
Inter-day data

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance62

Settings

The range of data to be deleted isspecified.
* Only the selected data is displayed.
Page 149 “3.4.7 Selecting Intra-Day and InterDay Data with {Select-s}”

147
NN1-1741 Rev.1

7
Error
Handling

3.4 Accuracy Control

3

1

Touch {Del}.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3

When the {Del} button is touched, the data in the memory is deleted. However, the data on the hard disk is notdeleted until {Register} is touched.

AppliedOperations

4

Touch {OK}.
* The data in memory is updated.

4* The data specified on the screen isdeleted.

Prep
Functions{Close}: Aborts deleting the intra-day and inter-day
data.

5
Maintenance5

Touch {Continue}.

6

Touch {Register}.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Returns to the [Select data processing]screen.

148
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

3.4.7

Selecting Intra-Day and Inter-Day Data with {Select-s}

1
Overview

On the [Intra-day/Inter-day] screen, the data can be specified within a test date range (from starting point toending point).
—
It is used when deleting a batch of intra-day or inter-day data or when displaying the X-R control.

2

Basic
The explanation starts from the condition at which the [QC lot select] screen is switched to the [IntraOperation
day/Inter-day] screen.
* The QC lot has been selected already on the [QC lot select] screen.
Page 142 “3.4.4 Opening the [Intra-day/Inter-day] Screen”

3
1
○
○

AppliedOperations

Select the data to be specified.
Inter-day data
Intra-day data4
Prep
Functions5
2

MaintenanceSpecify the test date of the starting
point.

① Touch the test date to be the starting
point.

1② Touch {Select-s}.

6
Settings* The starting point is set.
* When the starting point is set, {Select-s}changes to {Select}.

2

7
Error
Handling

3

Specify the test date of the ending
point.
① Touch the test date to be the ending
point.
② Touch {Select}.

1* The ending point is set.

2

* When the ending point is set,{Select}changes to {Clear}.
{Select-s}: Sets the starting point of the range.
{Select}: Sets the ending point of the range.
{Clear}: Aborts the range specification.

149
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

When the dates specified as the starting point and ending point are the same, only one test data set is specified.

1

To redo the range specification, touch {Clear}.

Overview

All test data are displayed, and no range is specified.
—

If the [X-R control] screen is opened instead of the [Intra-day/Inter-day] screen from the [QC lot select] screen,
all the data are specified.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

150
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control—

3.4.8 Displaying X-R Control

1
Overview—

The X-R control of the intra-day and inter-day data can be displayed.
—
On the [QC lot select] screen, when the intra-day data is selected, X-R control of the intra-day data opens.
—
When the inter-day data is selected, X-R control of the intra-day data is displayed.

Basic
Operation

When there is no test data, switching from the [QC lot select] tab to another tab is not available.

1

2

Touch {Process data}.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions2

Touch {Process QC}.

5Maintenance6
Settings

3

7

Select the test item.

Error
Handling① Select an item with a radio button (●).
② Touch {OK}.
{Close}: Returns to the previous screen.
1

2

151
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

41

The [QC lot select] screen opens.
* The QC lots used in recent days are
displayed sequentially.
(The display order is from left to right andfrom top to bottom.)

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3

5

AppliedOperations

Select a QC and QC lot.
Page 140 “3.4.2 Selecting a QC Lot”

4
Prep
Functions5

6

Touch the {Intra-day/Inter-day} tab.

7

Select the X-R control data.

Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling—

Page 149 “3.4.7 Selecting Intra-Day
and Inter-Day Data with {Select-s}”

152
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

8—

Touch the {X-R control} tab.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

93—

X-R control is displayed.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance
The max value is determined by replicate number and measured value.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

153
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

1

e

c

Overview

a

2

d

Basic
Operationb

3

fAppliedOperations—[Screen] : X-R control

4

a

Prep
Functions

X graph—

Displays the data for the test date or test date and time.

(upper graph)

Displays the mean of all values and ± #SD.



The max. value and the min. value set on the [Assay] - –QC process] –Set} tab are displayed in blue.

5

displayed in red.

Maintenanceb

6

Data less than min. value +1 and more than max. value +1 arec

Settings

R graph

Displays the data range for each test date or the test date and time.

(lower graph)

Displays the R upper control limit..

Max Value

Displays the Max. Value set on the [Assay] - –QC process] - –Set} tab.

Min Value

Displays the min. value set on the [Assay] - –QC process] - –Set} tab.

+ #SD



Displays the calculated + #SD value and the SD coefficient (# = 1 – 9)
set on the [Assay] - –QC process] - –Set} tab.

-#SD

7



Displays the calculated - #SD value and the SD coefficient (# = 1 – 9)
set on [Assay] - –QC process] - –Set} tab.

Error
Handling

d

Mean



The calculated mean value▼ (In the graph)

Indicates that the CC has changed.



Displays the R1/R2 reagent lot next to the ▼ mark.



Moves the cursor (vertical line) displayed on the graph.

Changes the range in X-R control (max. and min. concentrations andR max. value)ef{Range change}—154
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control—

1

3.4.9 Changing the Range of X-R Control

Overview—

The X-R control (graph) range can be changed.
—

control] screen.
The explanation starts from the [X-R—

2Page 151 “3.4.8 Displaying X-R Control”

1

Basic
Operation

Touch {Range change}.

3
AppliedOperations

4
2

Prep
Functions

Change the range.
① Touch the entry field of a setting.
② Enter a number using the numeric
keypad.

1

5

 Max. value of concentration

Maintenance Min. value of concentration2

 R max limit.
③ Touch {OK} or {enter}.

6
Settings
3

3

7

Touch {Continue}.

Error
Handling

155
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.4 Accuracy Control

4

1

Touch {OK}.
—* Displays the X-R control after the rangechange.

Overview{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Close}: Aborts the rangechanging process and—returns to the [X-R control] screen.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

5

Touch {Continue}.

6

Touch {Register}.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance—* X-R control is registered.
* Returns to the [Select data processing]screen.

6
Settings{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
—
{Discard}: Aborts the registration of X-R control andreturns to the [Select data processing]screen.

7
Error
Handling

156
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.5

LOG IN/LOG OUT

1Overview

To use all the functions on the [MENU] screen, logging in is necessary. Enter the operator ID on the [LOGIN]
screen and log in. The operator ID is then displayed.

2
BasicOperation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

3.5.1

LOGIN

5
Maintenance

When the system starts up, the [LOGIN] screen opens.
For the login procedure, see the page 28 “2.3 Logging In.”

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

157
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.5 LOG IN/LOG OUT

3.5.2

1

LOGGING OUT

Overview

1

Touch the {Lock} mark at the lower
section of the [MENU] screen(displaying the currently logged inoperator ID).

2

Touch {LOGIN / LOGOUT}.

3

Touch {LOGOUT}.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.

6

{Close}: Returns to the [MENU] screen while
keeping the current LOGIN/LOGOUT
condition.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

4

Returns to the [MENU] screen. The ID
display changes to the “Login”
message (indicating the logged-out
condition).

158
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.5 LOG IN/LOG OUT

3.5.3

Changing a Password

1
Overview

The password of the currently logged in operator can be changed.
The explanation starts from the logged in condition.

2

For the logging in procedure, see page 28 “2.3 Logging In.”

Basic
Operation

1

Touch the {Lock} mark at the lower
section of the [MENU] screen (theoperator ID of the currently logged inoperator is displayed).

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions2

Touch {Change password}.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

3

Set a new password.

7
Error
Handling① Enter the “new password”.
② Enter the same password again in the“New password (Confirm)” field.
zzzzz: Operator ID(zzzzz) : Operator name159
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3.5 LOG IN/LOG OUT

1

4

Touch {Continue}.

5

Touch {Register}.
The password is changed.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations* The display returns to the [LOGIN] screen.

4{Cancel}: Closes the dialog.

Prep
Functions{Discard}: Returns to the [LOGIN] screen.
The password is not changed.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

160
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Chapter 4 Prep Functions
4.1
4.2
4.3

Initialization
Priming
Washing161
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1
Overview

Chapter 4 Prep Functions

2

4.1

Basic
Operation

Initialization
This function initializes (moves to the standby position) each mechanism in the system. The
following mechanisms will be initialized.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions Sample nozzle

 Reagent nozzle

 Mixer Reaction table Puncturing system

 Squeezing system

 Rack setting position

 Reagent refrigerator

 Rack transfer system

Touching {Prep functions} on the [MENU] screen opens the [Initialize] screen.

1

Touch {Prep functions}.

2

Touch {Start}.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling{Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.

162
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4.1 Initialization

3

Initialization is executed.

1
Overview{Pause}: Pauses initialization.
{Start}: Starts initialization.
When {Pause} is touched, the button changes to{Start}.
{Abort}: Aborts initialization.

2
Basic
Operation

43

Initialization has ended.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

163
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4.2

1

Priming

Overview

This function introduces washing solution and purified water into the pipes.

2

1

Touch {Prep functions}.

2

Touch the {Prime} tab.

3

Select the items to prime.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings○ YES: Executes priming○ NO: Does not execute priming

7

4

Touch {Start}.
* Priming starts.

Error
Handling

164
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4.2 Priming

5

Priming is executing.

1
Overview* When priming completes, the dialog box closes.

{Pause}: Pauses the process.

2{Start}: The process restarts. Touching {Pause}changes the button to {Start}.

Basic
Operation{Abort}: Aborts the process in mid-course.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

165
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4.3

1

Washing

Overview

When the {Wash} tab is touched on the [MENU] – [Prep functions] screen, the [Wash] screen opens. Selectthe parts to be washed and the storage process (soak wash), and touch {Start}.
Washing of each part starts.

2
Basic
Operation

1

Touch {Prep functions}.

2

Touch the {Wash} tab.

3

Select “YES” or “NO” for each part tobe washed. (See the table on the next
page.)

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

166
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4.3 Washing

Part to be washed

Range/selection

Content

1● WashingSample dispensing nozzle

Yes :
No :

Washes the sample dispensing nozzle.
Does not wash the sample dispensing nozzle.

Reagent dispensing nozzle

Yes :
No :

Washes the reagent dispensing nozzle.
Does not wash the reagent dispensing nozzle.

Mixer

Yes :
No :

Washes the mixer.
Does not wash the mixer.

Yes :
No :

Soak the nozzle and mixer for storage.
Does not soak the nozzle and mixer for storage.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation● Storage
Nozzle and mixer

4

3
AppliedOperations

Touch {Start}.

4
Prep
Functions5{Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.

5

Maintenance6

Washing is executed.

Settings{Pause}: Pauses washing.

7{Start}: Starts washing.

Error
Handling

Touching {Pause} changes the button to {Start}.
{Abort}: Aborts washing.

167
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4.3 Washing

6

1

Washing has ended.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

168
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Chapter 5 Maintenance
5.1
5.2

Inspection and Maintenance
List of Parts to Check and Replace169
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1
Overview

Chapter 5 Maintenance

2

5.1

Basic
Operation

Inspection and MaintenanceOn the [Maintenance] screen, inspection and maintenance items to be conductedperiodically (daily, weekly, and monthly) are displayed.

3

In addition, touching {Procedure} enables inspections and maintenance orders.

AppliedOperations

5.1.1 Opening the [Maintenance] Screen

4

On the [MENU] screen, touching {Maintenance} opens the [Maintenance] screen.

Prep
Functions1

Touch {Maintenance}.

2

The [Maintenance] screen opens.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

170
NN1-1741 Rev.1

5.1 Inspection and Maintenance

5.1.2

Cleaning Control Panel (Daily)

1Overview

On the [Maintenance] screen, touching {Procedure} on the right side of [1. Clean touch panel] displays thecleaning procedure.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4

Procedure

Wipe the touch panel with cotton or a soft
towel.

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings{Close}: Returns to the [Maintenance] screen.

7
Error
Handling

171
NN1-1741 Rev.1

5.1 Inspection and Maintenance

5.1.3

1

Cleaning the Rack Lane (Daily)

Overview

On the [Maintenance] screen, touching {Procedure} on the right side of [2. Clean rack lane] displays thecleaning procedure.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
FunctionsProcedure① Wet a soft cloth with ethanol.
Caution: Wring the cloth tightly.

5② Wipe the rack lane with the cloth described
in ①.

Maintenance6
Settings{Close}: Return to the [Maintenance] screen.

7
Error
Handling

172
NN1-1741 Rev.1

5.1 Inspection and Maintenance

5.1.4

Cleaning Washing Solution and Purified Water Compartments (Daily)

1Overview

On the [Maintenance] screen, touching {Procedure} on the right side of [3. Cleaning Washing Solution and
Purified Water Compartments] displays the cleaning procedure.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4■

Procedure

Prep
Functions① Wet a soft cloth with ethanol.
Caution: Squeeze the cloth tightly.

5② Wipe the compartment with the cloth
described in ①.

Maintenance6{Close}: Returns to the [Maintenance] screen.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

173
NN1-1741 Rev.1

5.1 Inspection and Maintenance

5.1.5

1

Cleaning the Reagent Cap Tray (Daily)

Overview

On the [Maintenance] screen, touching {Procedure} on the right side of [4.Clean reagent caps tray]
displays the cleaning procedure.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions■

Procedure① Clean the reagent cap tray using a clothwetted with purified water.

5② Clean the reagent cap tray using a clothwetted with ethanol.

MaintenanceCaution: Please squeeze the cloth tightly.

6{Close}: Returns to the [Maintenance] screen.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

174
NN1-1741 Rev.1

5.1 Inspection and Maintenance

5.1.6

Cleaning the Nozzles (Weekly)

1

On the [Maintenance] screen, touching {Procedure} on the right side of [5. Cleaning nozzles] displays thecleaning procedure.
■
Procedure① Hold the red circles on the covers of thesample nozzle and reagent nozzle, slowly
lift them up, and rotate to a position where it

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

is easy to clean.
Caution: Do not hold the nozzle itself to lift it.
The nozzle may bend.
Caution: The tip of the nozzle may break so be

3
AppliedOperations

careful not to touch other mechanical parts whenmoving it.

② Clean about 20 mm from the tip of thedispensing nozzle with a cloth wetted with

4
Prep
Functionspurified water.
③ Clean about 20 mm from the tip of thedispensing nozzle with a cloth wetted withethanol.

5
MaintenanceCaution: Please squeeze the cloth tightly.
Caution: The tip of the nozzle is sharp, so be
careful not to pierce your hand when cleaning it.

6
Settings④ After cleaning is completed, close the safety
guard and initialize the Prep functions. The
position will be initialized automatically.

7

Page 162 “4.1 Initialization”

Error
Handling{Close}: Returns to the [Maintenance] screen.
{Next}: Changes the screen to the next page.

{Back}: Changes the screen to the previous page.

20mm

175
NN1-1741 Rev.1

5.1 Inspection and Maintenance

5.1.7

Cleaning the Racks (Weekly)

1
Overview

On the [Maintenance] screen, touching {Procedure} on the right side of [6. Clean racks] displays thecleaning procedure.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4

■

Prep
Functions

Procedure
Check that there are no foreign objects atthe section where the sampling bottle andsample cup are installed. If any foreign
objects are found, remove them by
inverting and shaking the rack.

5
MaintenanceCaution: Do not wash the rackas it has a rack barcode affixed to it.

6{Close}: Returns to the [Maintenance] screen.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

176
NN1-1741 Rev.1

5.1 Inspection and Maintenance

5.1.8

Cleaning Bottles/Tanks (Monthly)

1
Overview

On the [Maintenance] screen, touching {Procedure} on the right side of [7. Clean bottle/tank] displays thecleaning procedure. Clean the tank once a month.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4■

Procedure

Purified water bottle/washing solution bottle
Rinse with purified water.
Drain tank
<When normal>
Wash thoroughly with tap water and rinse
with purified water.
<In case of severe contamination>① Wash thoroughly with tap water.
② Pour 2L of tap water and 20 mL ofwashing solution into the tank.
Tap water: 2L, Washing solution: 20 mL③ Close the tank cap securely and shakethe tank. (In case of severe
contamination, leave for about one
hour.)④ Wash inside the tank thoroughly withtap water and rinse with purified water.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling{Close}: Returns the screen to the [Maintenance]screen.

Caution : Insufficient rinsing with purified water may affect the test data.

177
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Prep
Functions5.2

1

List of Parts to Check and Replace

Overview

On the [Parts checklist] screen, the part names, last replacement date, number ofmonths used, and number of use counts are displayed.

2

5.2.1 Opening the [Parts checklist] Screen

Basic
Operation

On the [Maintenance] screen, touching [Parts checklist] opens the [Parts checklist]
screen. The parts that have expired (the number of months or use count has been

3

exceeded) will be indicated in yellow.

AppliedOperations

1

Touch {Maintenance}.

2

Touch {Parts checklist}.

3

The [Parts checklist] screen opens.

4
PrepFunctions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

The lines of the expired parts are yellow.

178
NN1-1741 Rev.1

5.2 List of Parts to Check and Replace

5.2.2

Replacing Parts

1
Overview

The expired parts can be replaced.
This explanation starts from the condition at which the [Parts checklist] screen is displayed.
1

2

Replace the parts marked in yellow.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
2
1

Prep
Functions

Reset the number of month and use
count for the parts replacement.
① Touch the line of the replaced part.
② Touch {Exchange}.

5
Maintenance2

6
Settings③ Touch {Start}.
* The number of months and use countbecome “0.”* The dialog box closes.
{Close}: Aborts the resetting of the months and use
count.
3179
NN1-1741 Rev.1

7
Error
Handling

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

180
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Chapter 6 Settings
6.1 System Settings
6.2 Protocol Settings

181
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1
Overview

Chapter 6 Settings

2

6.1

Basic
Operation

System Settings

When using the system for the first time, the system settings must be set. After the system settings arecompleted, no change is necessary for daily testing, unless other settings are needed.
For an outline of the setting items in “System Settings,” see page 31 “2.4.1 System Settings.”

3
AppliedOperations

6.1.1

Sample Barcode Settings (Common)

This section describes the common settings which are used to read the sample barcodes.

4
Prep
Functions

When the user is logged in with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” changing
the settings becomes possible.

1

Touch {Settings}.

2

Touch {Sample barcode}.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

182
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

3

Set the items on the {Common} tab.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
Setting item
Sample barcode

Selection/setting
YES:
NO:

Duplicated check
YES:
NO:

AppliedOperations

Content
Barcodes are affixed to the samples.
Barcodes are not affixed to the samples.
From system startup to power off:
Checks for duplicate sample barcodes.
Does not check for duplicate sample barcodes4
Prep
FunctionsHowever, even if this is set to “YES,” if the test mode isretest or dilution and retest, the duplicate check is notconducted.

Barcode reader type
Decode accord times
Barcode to be used

1D:
2D:
Number input

5

Uses only 1D codes.
Uses both 1D and 2D codes.
Sets 10 times as a rough target.
Select the barcodes to be used (■).
Up to four types of barcodes can be selected.

Maintenance

Decode accord times

6

The barcode reader scans a maximum of 500 times when reading a sample barcode. In this process, theSettings

number which the barcode has been properly read is called the decode times.
“Decode accord times” is the number of reading which is sufficient for proper reading.
When the larger number is set to [Decode accord times], erroneous reading of the barcode can be prevented.
However, at the same time, occurrence rate of “barcode reading error” increases.

4

Detailed settings for each barcode typeare set next.
Page 184 “6.1.2 Sample Barcode Settings(Detailed Settings for Each Barcode Type)”183
NN1-1741 Rev.1

7
Error
Handling

6.1 System Settings

6.1.2

1

Sample Barcode Settings (Detailed Settings for Each Barcode Type)

Overview

In [Samp barcode settings], there are items to set according to barcode types in addition to the common
settings. Available barcodes are CODE39, ITF, JAN, NW-7, IND2of5, CODE128, and COOP2of5. The
barcode settings can be seen by selecting the corresponding barcode name tabs.

2

When the user is logged in with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” the settings

Basic
Operation

can be changed.

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [Samp barcode settings] screen is displayed.

3

Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”AppliedOperations

1

Touch the barcode tab to be set.
(Example)
Touch the {NW-7} tab.

4
PrepFunctions5
Maintenance2

Set each item.
(See Tables 6.1.1 - –.1.4.)

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

For the CODE39, JAN, and ITF barcodes, the check digit calculation method cannot be changed.

3

Touch {Continue}.

184
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

4

Touch {Register}.

1
Overview{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts registration of the Samp barcode
settings and returns to the [System Settings]
screen.
{Register}: Registers the set contents.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

185
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

When “YES” is selected for the check digit test, the last character of the barcode (one character before the1start/stop character) is tested as a check digit.

Overview

Table 6.1.1 Samp barcode settings
Set item
Selection/setting
Barcode digits
Digit

2
Basic
Operation

Content
Sets the number of digits of sample barcode.
When “*” is input, the number of barcode digits is notchecked.
(Used when several number of digits exist for the sample
barcode.)3

The range of input changes according to the “YES” or “NO”

AppliedOperations

setting for “Start/stop character del.“See Table 6.1.2 for details.

Start/stop
character del4

Sets whether the start/stop character is deleted.
(Valid when NW-7 is selected.)

YES : Deletes the start/stop character.
NO : Does not delete the start/stop character.

Prep
Functions

Check digit test5

Check digit calculation
methodMaintenance

Sets whether the check digit test is conducted or not.
YES : Conducts the check digit test.
NO : Does not conduct the check digit test.
See Table 6.1.3 Sets the check digit calculation method.
(Valid when NW-7 is selected.)

For the input range and the calculation method of the check digit, see Table 6.1.3.

6

Table 6.1.2 Range of input for barcode digits

Settings

Barcode type

NW-7

7

Start/stop
character deletion

Input range
Max.

Yes

17

No

15

Invalid15

6Invalid155Invalid

50

6

Min.

5

ITF

Error
Handling

IND2of5
COOP2of5
CODE39JAN
CODE128
QR
Data MatriX
PDF417
GS1 DataBar
Omni-directional

186
NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.2

6.1 System Settings

Table 6.1.3 Input No. and Calculation Method
Input No.
Calculation method

Table 6.1.4 Barcode Type and Calculation Method
Barcode typeCalculation method

1

Modulus 10/3 weight

CODE39Modulus 43 (fixed)

2

Modulus 16

JAN

Modulus 10/3 weight (fixed)

3

Modulus 11

ITF

Modulus 10/3 weight (fixed)

4

Modulus 10/2 weight

NW-7

Modulus 10/3 weight5

Modulus 10/3 weight

Modulus 16

6

7 check DR

Modulus 11

7

Weighting modulus

Modulus 10/2 weight

8

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

7 check DR

Loons

Weighting modulus
Loons
No check digit

4

CODE128

No check digit

Prep
Functions

COOP2of5

No check digit

QR

No check digit

Data Matrix

No check digit

PDF417

No check digit

GS1 DataBar
Omni-directional

No check digit

IND2of5

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

187
NN1-1741 Rev.2
Rev.1
NN1-1741

6.1 System Settings

6.1.3

1

Rack Setting

Overview

The range of sample rack numbers.used for S sample bottle are set here.
During testing, racks with numbers in this range are processed as “sample racks.”

2

When the user is logged in with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” settings can be

BasicOperationchanged.

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [System Settings] screen is displayed.

3

Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”AppliedOperations

1

Touch {Rack No. settings}.

2

Set the range of sample rack numbers.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance(See page 189)

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

3

Touch {Continue}.

* The dialog for the change/registration
check appears.

188
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

4

Touch {Register}.

1
Overview{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts the rack range setting and returns to
the [System Settings] screen.

2
Basic
Operation{Register}: Registers the set contents.

3
AppliedOperations

Table 6.1.5 Rack setting
Setting
S. bottle Rack No.

Value

Meaning

1 - 99–Sets the Rack No. range for S sample bottle.

Min.:
Max.:

4

When “*” is entered, the range specification is

Prep
Functionsdisabled.

To disable the rack No. range setting, enter “*.”After “*” is entered for the Min. or Max. value, touch the other value (Max. or Min. value). “*” is automatically5set, and Rack No. range setting is disabled.
(If only one of Min. and Max. is “*,” registration is not possible.)

Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

189
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.4

1

Config.

Overview

In Config., the following items are set.

2Date and timePassword

When the user is logged in with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” settings can

Basic
Operation

be changed.

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [System Settings] screen is displayed.
Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”3
AppliedOperations

1

Touch {Config.}

2

Set the Config.

4PrepFunctions5
Maintenance(See the next page.)
The screen differs depending onwhether or not a password isregistered.

6
Settings

7

When a password is not registered

Error
Handling

When a password is registered190
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

3

Touch {Continue}.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

4

3

Touch {Register}.

AppliedOperations{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts Config. and Returns to the [System
Settings] screen.

4
Prep
Functions{Register}: Registers the set contents.

5
Maintenance

Setting

Value

Date
20(XX)YY – (XX)MM –(XX)DD ( ):( )MIN

Meaning□ Setting To set the date and time, select the checkbox (■).
Year:0- 99

6Settings

Month:1- 12
Day:1- 31
Hour:0- 23
Minute:0- 59
Sample start No.

1 - 99–99

Password registration

Password:

Old password
New password

7

Sets an initial value for the sample sequence No.

Error
Handling

Selects whether or not a password is registered.
Yes:No:
5 – 30 ch.
(0 - 9,–-, X,
Y, Z, ． , /)5- 30 ch.
(0 - 9,–-, X,
Y, Z,． , /)Registers a password.
Does not register a password.
Enter the password here.

(When a password is set)
Changes the password.

To delete a password, touch {Continue} to register without entering anything in the “New password” field.

191
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.5

1
Overview

Data Output - [S–lecting Data Output Destination]

The following destinations can be set for data output:

2
Basic
Operation



Output of test data to a printer (printing)

Output of test data to external media



Output of time course to external media



Output of test data to a computer

When the user is logged with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” settings can bechanged.

3

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [System Settings] screen is displayed.

AppliedOperations

Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”1

Touch {Data output}.

2

Touch {Destination}.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance{Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.

6{Close}: Returns to the [System Settings] screen.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

3

Select the destinations for data output(see the next page).

192
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

Setting
Output to printer

Value
YES

NO
Output to Ext. media

YES
NO
Serial No. folder creation

YSENOTime course to Ext. media
YES
NO
Output data online

YES
NO
Output units
Average
Replicate
QC limit value check
ON

OFF

Meaning
Selects whether or not test data is printed.
During a test, the test data is printed in real time.
If “Print Saving mode” in which only the STD
and QC process results and errors are printed isdesired, please contact your seller.

1
Overview

2

Does not print test data.

Basic
Operation

Selects whether or not test data is automaticallysent to the external media upon completion of thetest.
Output to the external media.
Not output to the external media.
Selects whether or not a serial No. folder iscreated on the external media when outputting
test data.
Creates a serial No. folder. (Ex. 00226)
Does not create a serial No. folder.
Selects whether or not a time course is output tothe external media.
Output to the external media.
Not output to the external media.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

Selects whether or not the test data is output to acomputer.
Detailed settings for computer output are foundon the [Online settings] screen.
Outputs online.
Does not output online.
Selects the output format for sample or QC test
data output online.
Outputs an average value of the output test
results.
Outputs all measured data.
Selects the QC control limit value check.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

If the data is normal as a result of the check, thetest result is output as is. Otherwise the QC control
limit value error is output.
Outputs the measured results as-is.

193
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

1

4

Touch {Continue}.

5

Touch {Register}.

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.

4

{Discard}: Aborts selection of data output and returns
the screen to the [Data output] screen.

Prep
Functions{Register}: Register the set contents.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

194
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.6

Data output - [O–line Settings]

1
Overview

The control conditions for network communication are set.
For details, refer to “OC-SENSOR Ceres Interface Specifications.”
When the user is logged in with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” settings can bechanged.

2
BasicOperation

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [System Settings] screen is displayed.
Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”1

3

Touch {Data output}.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions25

Touch {Online settings}.

Maintenance{Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.
{Close}: Returns to the [ System Settings] screen.

6
Settings

7
3

Error
Handling

Select the conditions for network
communication (see the next page).

195
NN1-1741 Rev.2
Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

Setting
IP address□.□.□.□

1
Overview

Port No.
Outgoing/Incoming
Order request

2

Value
0 - 254
1 - 65535

YES
NO

Basic
Operation

Com mode3
Baudrate

2400

4

4800
9600
19200
38400

Prep
Functions

Length785MaintenanceParity
None
Even
Odd

6
Settings

Stop bit
1
2
Trans.

7NONE
ACK/NAK

Error
Handling

Selects whether or not order requests are sent to the upper levelsystem.
Sends an order request.
Does not send an order request.
Selects a communication mode.

OC sensor IO
PLEDIA
LAN
ASTM
HL7

AppliedOperations

Meaning
Sets the IP and port number for the network connection.
* Valid only when the communication mode is LAN or HL7.

Delimiter
STX/ETX
CR/LF
CR
Chk. Char
BCC
SUM
NO
Separator
YESNO

OC sensor IO compatible mode
OC sensor PLEDIA-compatible mode
LAN communication mode
ASTM communication mode
HL7 communication mode
Selects the communication speed.
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
38400 bps
Selects the word length
7 bits8 bitsSelect 8-bit when sending 2-byte characters.
Selects the parity check.
Do not use parity check.
Check with even-number parity.
Check with odd-number parity.
Select as the stop bit.
1 bit
2 bitsSelects the transmission control.
Does not use transmission control
Uses ACK/NAK control.
Selects the delimiter.
Start of Text (0x02) / End of Text (0x03)
Carriage Return (0x0D) / Line Feed (0x0A)
Carriage Return (0x0D)
Selects the error detecting method.
Block Check CodeSum
Does not use a check character.
Selects whether or not commas (,) are used to separate data
items.
Separated by commas.
Not separated by commas.

196
NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.9
Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

In the case of LAN or HL7 communication, the settings for delimiter, check character, and item separation1

become “none.”For ASTM communication, the settings for delimiter, check character, and item separation are fixed. They cannot

Overview

be changed on the setting screen.

2
4

Basic
Operation

Touch {Continue}.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5

Touch {Register}.

5
Maintenance{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts Online settings and returns to the[Data output] screen.
{Register}: Registers the set content.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

197
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.7

1
Overview

Data Output - [T–st Setting]

The test items to be handled by the system are set here.
When the user is logged with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” settings can bechanged.

2

Settings are also available from the [Assay] screen, [Retest] screen, [QC process] screen, and the [Set reagent]
screen.

Basic
Operation

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [System Settings] screen is displayed.
Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”3

1

Touch {Data output}.

2

Touch {Test setting}.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance{Menu}: Returns to the [MENU] screen.
{Close}: Returns to the [System Settings] screen.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

3

Selects the test items (see the nextpage).

198
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

Setting
Test item

Value

Meaning1

selects the test item.
[FOBT] Fecal hemoglobin[FCa] Calprotectin

4

Overview

2

Touch {Continue}.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
5

Prep
Functions

Touch {Register}.

5{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.

Maintenance{Discard}: Aborts the test setting and returns to theprevious screen.
{Register}: Registers the set content.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

199
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.8

1

Output Format Settings (Basic Format)

Overview

The output format of data such as the rack, sample No., sample ID, etc. can be set for each output
destination (printer, external media, and network).
For data output to a printer, the settings for the rack, sample No., and sample ID cannot be changed.

2

When the user is logged with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” the settings can

Basic
Operation

be changed.

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [System Settings] screen is displayed.
Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”3
AppliedOperations

1

Touch {Output format}.

2

Select an output item (see page 202).

3

Touch {Continue}.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

200
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

4

Touch {Register}.

1
Overview{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts the output format and returns to the[System Settings] screen.
{Register}: Registers the set content.

2
Basic
Operation

3

An item with a check mark is output.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

201
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

1

Output item
Test item

Meaning
Selects test items for output.

Overview

Common90 : [FOBT]
53 : [FCa]2
BasicOperationcommon settings (items 1 - 8)–
FOBT setting (items 9 - 10–)
FCa setting (items 9 - 10–)

1.Small space
PrinterLine spacing becomes narrower when printing.

Printer

A line feed is output at the following positions during printing.
Between test data sets

Between items when testing multiple items(Applied for both real time and processed data printing.)

Printer
OnlineRack No. and Rack Position No. are output.
Rack No. and Rack Position No. are output.

Printer
OnlineOutputs sample Nos.
Outputs sample Nos.

Printer
OnlineOutputs sample IDs.
Outputs sample IDs.

Printer

Prints DA values.
Outputs DA values.

Printer
OnlineOutputs judged results.
Outputs judged results.

OnlineOutputs test dates.

2. New line

3
AppliedOperations

3. Rack No.

4
Prep
Functions5

4. Sample No.

5. Sample ID

Maintenance

6. DA value

6
Settings

7. Flag (+-)

8. Date7
Error
Handling

9. Value Format

Selects the output format for the measured data.

####### (integer)#####.# (1st digit of decimal number)

Outputs integers.
Outputs numbers with one decimal digit (all measured data values arerounded up.)

10. QL, QN
Qualitative
QL, QN

Outputs the qualitative value of the measured results.
Outputs the qualitative and quantitative values of the measured results.

When the communication mode is set to ASTM on the [Online settings] screen, only the [Value Format] and [QL, QN]
settings are applied, and other settings are not applied.

202
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.9

Output Format Setting (External Media)

1
Overview

The data output to external media can be selected, and the output order can be changed.
When the user is logged in with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” the settings

2

can be changed.

Basic
Operation

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [System Settings] screen is displayed.
Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”1

3

Touch {Output format}.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions2

Touch the {Ext. Media} tab.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

3

7

Select the test information to bechanged using the radio buttons.

Error
Handling

203
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

4

1

Change the order of output and select theoutput data.
Output items: List of items to be output

Overview
1

Output order to: The data is output in the ordershown.

2

3

2① When an item on the left-side <Item> list is
selected and the {>>} button is clicked,
the corresponding item is added to theright-side <Output items> list.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations② To delete an item from <Output items>,
select the item in the list and touch the{<<} button.

4③ Use the {▲} and {▼} buttons to change
the order of a selected item.

Prep
Functions{Reset}: Returns to the initial condition.

5
Maintenance{}: Scrolls the list upward.

{}: Scrolls the list downward.

Some items are necessary for output. Such items cannot be deleted from the <Output items> list. For the items
required for output, see

271 “4 Saving to External Media.”

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

204
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

5

Touch {Continue}.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

6

3

Touch {Register}.

AppliedOperations{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.

4

{Discard}: Aborts output format andPrepFunctions

returns to the [System Settings] screen.
{Register}: Registers the set content.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

205
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.10 User Account Settings

1
Overview

Operator IDs can be registered, deleted, and changed.
If the current operator ID is “User,” registration and changing the operator ID of the administrator is not2

possible. Setting an administrator ID is available only when the user is logged in with an administrator ID or
when Operator mode is set to “NO.”

Basic
Operation

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [System Settings] screen is displayed.
Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”3
AppliedOperations

1

Touch {User account}.

2

Select “New,” “Change,” or “Delete.”4
PrepFunctions5
Maintenance6* At “ID:”, the ID of the currently logged inoperator is displayed.

Settings

37Enter each setting.

<In case of a new registration>
Register a new operator ID by entering theitems in the following order.
① Operator ID② Operator name
③ Password④ Privilege⑤ Automatic logout time

Error
Handling{Reset}: Clears the entered value.
The privilege returns to “User.”206
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

Up to 20 operator IDs can be registered.

1

The operator ID registered first automatically becomes an administrator

3

1

2

4
6

5

Overview<To change an ID>
Enter the items in the following order for theoperator ID to be changed.
① Enter the current operator ID.

2* Selecting from the {User list} is also available.
* The current operator name, new operator ID
and operator name are automatically filled in.

② Enter the current password.

3③ Enter the new operator ID and name.
The current operator ID and name can beleft as they are.

AppliedOperations④ Enter a new password.
To use a new password, enter a password
different from the current password.

4
Prep
Functions{Reset}: Clears the entered value.
The privilege returns to “User.”5⑤ Set the new privilege.
⑥ Set the automatic logout time.
<To delete an ID>

1

2

Basic
Operation

MaintenanceEnter the items in the following order for theoperator ID to be deleted.
① Operator ID* Selecting from the {User list} is also available.
* The Operator name will be automatically filledin.

6
Settings② Password

7{Reset}: Clears the entered value.

Error
Handling

207
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

1

Setting
Operator ID

Meaning
1 - 20–digits Enter an operator ID.
alphanumeric characters <when changing/deleting>Selecting from the {User list} is available.

Operator name1 - 20–digits
alphanumeric characters

Overview

2

Displays the name or the entered operator ID.
<when changing>
Enter the new operator’s name.

Basic
Operation

Password

3
AppliedOperations

5 - 10–digits
alphanumeric characters

Privilege
Admin.
User
Automatic logout
time

4
Prep
Functions5Enter a password.

Displays the privilege.
<when changing>
The privilege can be changed.

0 – 99 min. While the [MENU] screen is displayed, if nooperation is conducted for this length of time,
automatic logout occurs.

4

Touch {Continue}.

5

Touch {Register}.

Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts the user account setting and returns
to the [System Settings] screen.
{Register}: Registers the set content.

208
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.11 Language Settings

1
Overview

Application language can be selected.
When the user is logged in with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” the settings
can be changed.

2
Basic
Operation

The explanation starts from the condition at which the [System Settings] screen is displayed.
Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”3
1

Touch {Language setting}.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions25

Touch {▼} to select a language.

Maintenance6
Settings

7
3

Error
Handling

Touch {Continue}.

209
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

210
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

4

Touch {Register}.

{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts changing the language and returns to
the [System Settings] screen.
{Register}: Enables the selected language.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

5

3

After changing the language, restart thesystem.

AppliedOperations① Shut down the system.

4

Page 89 “2.7 Shutting Down the System”② Press the System switch to start up thesystem.

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

211
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.12 Operator Mode

1
Overview

The operator mode can be changed.
The explanation starts from the condition at which the [System Settings] screen is displayed.

2Page 182 “6.1.1 Sample Barcode Settings (Common)”Basic
Operation

1

Touch {Operator mode}.

2

Switch the Operator mode.

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance
Switching from “ON” to “OFF” isavailable only when logged in with anadministrator ID.

6
Settings

7

3

Error
Handling

Touch {Continue}.

212
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

4

Touch {Register}.

1{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts switching the Operator mode andreturns to the [System Settings] screen.
{Register}: Registers the set content.

Overview

2<When changed from “ON” to “OFF”>
Returns to the [MENU] screen.
Continue using the system as is.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations<When changing from “OFF” to “ON”>
Returns to the [MENU] screen and logs-out.
Touch the LOGIN button to log in.

4

Page 28 “2.3 Logging In”

Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

213
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.13 Printing the System Settings

1
Overview

The information registered in System Settings can be printed.

2

1

Touch {Settings}.

2

Touch {Print}.

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions* All the settings registered in [System
Settings] are printed.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

214
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.14 Backing Up System Settings and Protocol Settings

1
Overview

The system settings and protocol settings can be backed up.
When the user is logged in with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” backup is2

possible.

1

Connect the management USB stick tothe system.
For the management USB stick, see
Page 283 “Appendix 5 Management
USB Stick Setting”

2

Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Touch {Settings}.

4
PrepFunctions5
Maintenance3

Touch {Back up}.

6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

4

Touch {Start}.
* [System settings] and [Protocol settings]
are backed up to the external media.

{Close}: Aborts backup.
{Start}: Executes backup.

215
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.1 System Settings

6.1.15 Restoring System Settings and Protocol Settings

1
Overview

System settings and protocol settings can be restored from external media.
When the user is logged in with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” restoration2

becomes possible.

1

Basic
Operation

Connect the management USB stick tothe system.
For the management USB stick, seepage 283 “Appendix 5 Management
USB Stick Setting”

3

2

Touch {Settings}.

3

Touch {Restore}.

4

Touch {Start}.

AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling* [System Settings] and [Protocol settings]
are restored from the external media.

{Close}: Aborts restoring.
{Start}: Executes restoring.

216
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.2

Protocol Settings

1
Overview

The protocol settings can be roughly divided into the following three types:
Conditions for samples and QC samples (Sample/QC protocol settings)

2
Basic
Operation

CC protocol settingsCommon conditions for testing samples, STD samples, and QC samples (maker settings)

Protocol settings do not need to be changed for normal test flows unless the contents of the flow arechanged. In addition, the maker settings are set before shipping from the factory and are not available

3
AppliedOperations

for users.

6.2.1

4

Sample/QC Protocol Settings

Prep
Functions

Conditions to test the samples (including interrupted samples) and QC samples can be set. The
setting screen consists of two pages, and the tabs are used to switch the pages.
When the user is logged in with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” the settings can

5
Maintenancebe changed.

1

Touch {Settings}.

6
Settings

7
2

Error
Handling

Touch the {Protocol settings} tab.

217
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.2 Protocol Settings

1

3

Select a test item from the pull-down
menu.

4

Touch {Samp/QC protocol}.

5

Set each item (see page 220).

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance{Print}: Prints the [Sample and QC Protocol] settings.

6
Settings

7

6

Touch the {Page 2} tab.

Error
Handling{Print}: Prints the contents of [Samp/QC protocol].

218
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.2 Protocol Settings

7

Set each item (see page 221).

1
Overview

2{Print}: Prints the contents of [Samp/QC protocol].

Basic
Operation

8

Touch the {Page 3] ta}.

3
AppliedOperations

4{Print}: Prints the contents of [Samp/QC protocol].

Prep
Functions9

Maintenance5
Set each item (see page 222).

{Print}: Prints the contents of [Samp/QC protocol].

6

10 Touch {Continue}.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

11 Touch {Register}.

{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts and returns to the [Protocol settings]
screen.
{Register}: Registers the set content.

219
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.2 Protocol Settings{Page 1} tab

1

Setting

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

Value

Meaning

1

Samp Replicate

1 – 10 times

Sets the number of sample tests.

2

QC Replicate

1 – 10 times

Sets the number of QC sample tests.

3

Cut off 1

Sets the criteria for Cut off 1.
0 - 99–9999(integer)

1+
-

3

4

AppliedOperations

Cut off 2

Measured data ≦ Cut off 1

Sets the criteria for Cut off 2.
*,
0 - 99–9999(integer)4

Measured data is higher than “Cut off 1”
or equal to or lower than “Cut off 2”

2+

Cut off 2 < Measured data ≦ Cut off 3
When “*” is set, judging Cut off 2 isemitted.
Cut off 1 < Cut off 2

Prep
Functions5

Cut off 3*,
0 - 99–999(integer)

5
Maintenance6
Settings

6

Min Value

7

Max Value

0.0 -Sets the criteria for Cut off 3.

3+
UR

Displayed when the measured data is“Min. value or lower” in diluent retesting.

OR

Displayed when the measured data is“Max value” or higher.

99–9999.9
0.0 99–9999.9

Measured data exceeds the set value.
When “*” is set, judging Cut off 3 isemitted.
Cut off 2 < Cut off 3

7
Error
Handling

220
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.2 Protocol Settings{Page 2} tab
Setting
8

RBC check9

RBC coefficient

10

11

12
13

Value

Factor A
Factor B

Overview

Sets whether or not the RBC check is conducted. If
conducting the check, set by clicking the box.
Page 238 “■ RBC method”
1.00 - 2.–0

PRC check

PRC coefficient1

Meaning

0.01 - 2.–00.001 99–9.999

2

At the detection point of the RBC method, when the sample
ABS becomes larger than STD-6 ABS x “RBC coefficient,”
that sample is judged “prozone sample.”
Page 238 “■ RBC method”

Basic
Operation

Sets whether or not the PRC check is conducted. If
conducting the check, set by clicking the box.
Page 239 “■ PRC method”

AppliedOperations

At No. 2 detection point (T2), when the sample DA2 value
becomes larger than STD-6 DA2 value x “PRC
coefficient,” that sample is judged to be a “prozone
sample.”Page 239 “■ PRC method”

Prep
Functions

3

4

Measured data = A x Concentration value + B-999.999 99–.999

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

221
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.2 Protocol Settings{Page 3} tab

1

Setting
14 Level 1

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

Value
Check
Min.

*, 0 -

Max.

9999999*, 0 -

Sets the maximum value.

Scale

9999999
1Min. value < Max. value
Sets the dilution factor for automatic retest.

factor3
AppliedOperations

15

Level 24
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance

6

16

Level 3

10
20
100
200
400

Check

Error
Handling

Sets whether or not the automatic retest is
conducted for samples within the Level 2 range.
Sets the minimum value.

Min.

*, 0 -

Max.

9999999*, 0 -

Sets the maximum value.

9999999

Min. value < Max. value

Scale

1

factor

10
20
100
200
400

Check

Settings

7

Meaning
Sets whether or not the automatic retest is
conducted for samples within the Level 1 range.
Sets the minimum value.

Sets the dilution factor for automatic retest.

Sets whether or not the automatic retest is
conducted for samples within the Level 3 range.
Sets the minimum value.

Min.

*, 0 -

Max.

9999999*, 0 -

Sets the maximum value.

Scale

9999999
1Min. value < Max. value
Sets the dilution factor for automatic retest.

factor

10
20
100
200
400

222
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.2 Protocol Settings{Page 3} tab (continued)
Setting
17 RBC dil. factor

Value
Check

Scale
factor18

PRC dil. factor

1
10
20
100
200
400

Check

Scale
factor1

Meaning
Sets whether or not an automatic retest is
conducted for the prozone samples in the RBC
method.
Page 238 “■ RBC method”
Sets the dilution factor for automatic
retesting.
Page 238 “■ RBC method”

Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

Sets whether or not an automatic retest is
conducted for the prozone samples in the PRC
method.
Page 239 “■ PRC method”
1
10
20
100
200
400

4

Sets the dilution factor for automatic
retesting.
Page 239 “■ PRC method”

Prep
Functions5
MaintenanceTo perform automatic retest of OR, set the Level 1 Min. and Max values as follows.
Ex. In case of FOBT, because the test Max. value is 1000 ng/mL, set 1000.
Level 1 Min. value = 1000

6

Max value = *Settings

7
Error
Handling

223
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.2 Protocol Settings

6.2.2

1
Overview

CC Protocol Settings

The necessary conditions for STD sample measurements can be set.
The setting screen consists of two pages, and the tabs are used to switch pages.

2

When the user is logged with an administrator ID, or when “No” is selected for “Operator mode,” the settings can be

BasicOperationchanged.

.
The explanation starts from the condition at which the [Protocol settings] screen is displayed.
Page 217 “6.2.1 Sample/QC Protocol Settings”

3
AppliedOperations

1

Select a test item.

2

Touch {CC protocol}.

3

Set each item.

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

Page 226 “{Page 1} tab”

{Print}: Prints the [CC protocol] settings.

224
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.2 Protocol Settings

4

Touch the {Page 2} tab.

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

5

Set each item.

3

Page 226 “{Page 2} tab”

{Print}AppliedOperations

4: Prints the [CC protocol] settings.

Prep
Functions5
6

Maintenance

Touch {Continue}.

6
Settings

7
7

Error
Handling

Touch {Register}.

{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts and returns to the [Protocol settings]
screen.
{Register}: Registers the set content.

225
NN1-1741 Rev.1

6.2 Protocol Settings

1{Page 1} tab
Setting

Overview

1

Replicates

2

STD-6

2

3

STD-5

Basic
Operation

4

STD-4

5

STD-3

6

STD-2

7

STD-1

3
AppliedOperations

Value

Meaning
1 – 100 - 99–99.9

Sets the number of STD sample tests.
Sets the concentration value which is described in thecalibrator operation manual.

(No input){Page 2} tab

4

8

Prep
Functions

Setting
Operator’s
Judgment

Value

YES

NO

5
Maintenance

STD Spec.

6

9STD-6 DA Min DA-9999 99–99

Checks against the DA1 value.

10 STD-6 DA Max DA-9999 99–99

Sets as the Min. value < Max. value.

11 STD-6 - 3 –rigin value±□%

0 - 10–

Checks for deviation from the origin value.

12 STD-1 DA Min DA-9999 99–99

Checks against the DA1 value.

13 STD-1 DA Max DA-9999 99–99

Sets the Min. value < Max. value.

14 STD-2 DA Origin value±□ %0 - 10–

Checks for deviation from the origin value.

Settings

7
Error
Handling

Meaning
Sets whether or not the operator judges after creationof CC.
The system enters standby after the creation of CC in
order to wait for the operator’s judgment.
The operator does not judge.
When the measured data are normal, the measurement
continues. When the measured data are abnormal, wait
for the operator’s judgment. The system entersstandby.
Sets the standard value for each STD point.
The STD judgment is based on the specified values.

For the checking of the STD and QC measured data, see page 235 “1.1 STD/QC Sample Measured Data Check.”226
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Chapter 7 Error Handling
7.1 How to Read the [FUNCTION ERROR] Screen
7.2 Error Handling Buttons
7.3 Cancelling Errors

227
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1
Overview

Chapter 7 Error Handling
When an error occurs, the [FUNCTION ERROR] screen opens. If several errors have occurred, they are2

displayed on multiple pages. Touch {Next err} to display them.

Basic
Operation

7.1 How to Read the [FUNCTION ERROR] Screen

3eAppliedOperations

d
a

4
Prep
Functions

5b

Maintenance6
Settingsc[FUNCTION ERROR] Screen

7
Error
Handling

a
b
c

Error
Cause and method of cancellation
Page switching buttond{Back}{Next}
Handling buttons

Error No. and Error name.
Explains errors and displays the cancellation method.
When the handling method for one error is explained over several
pages, the pages can be switched.
Displays the previous page.
Displays the next page.
Cancels an error.

Error select buttons{Last err}
{Next err}

When several errors have occurred, error display is switched.
Displays the previous error.
Displays the next error.

Page 229 “7.2 Error Handling Buttons”

e228
NN1-1741 Rev.1

7.2

Error Handling Buttons

1
Overview

At the top of the [ERROR FUNCTION] screen, there are buttons to handle the errors. Operations after
touching the cancellation button are as follows.
Button name
{RETRY}

Function
Retries the sample process for which the error occurred.

{ABORT}

Ends the testing.
When selected during testing, finishes the current sample process.

{Continue}

Resumes the operation of the mechanism stopped by the error.

{Close}Closes the screen.

{MUTE}

Mutes the alarm sound.

{Shut down}

Shuts down the system.
It may require a few minutes until the system shuts down.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions

The cancellation button names change depending on the error.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

229
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1

7.3

Overview

Cancelling Errors

When an error occurs, cancel the error as follows:

2

1

Basic
Operation

Check the error.
① Check the section with the error, andthe error details.
② Touch one of the error handling buttons.
Page 229 “7.2 Error Handling Buttons”

3
AppliedOperations

4

2

Prep
Functions

When a button other than {Abort} isselected, the error is cancelled, and theoperation continues.

5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

230
NN1-1741 Rev.1

7.3 Cancelling Errors

2

1(Continued)

Overview<When {ABORT} is selected>① Touch { ABORT}.

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations② Touch { Abort}.
* Forcibly ends the processes on the reaction
table and returns to the [Assay] screen.
The results of samples testing are
discarded.
{ Abort}: Forcibly ends the process and returns to the[Assay] screen.
{Cancel}: Aborts the forcible end and returns to the[Error] screen.
{Close}: Returns to the [Assay] screen uponcompletion of the process on the reaction table.

For the following types of errors, touching {ABORT}

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6

ends the process forcibly without opening the dialog box for forcible end execution.

Settings

̶ Errors that occur during maintenance or prep functions (not during testing)̶ Errors that occur on the reaction table (Errors which cannot be closed)

7
Error
Handling

231
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1
Overview

2
Basic
Operation

3
AppliedOperations

4
Prep
Functions5
Maintenance6
Settings

7
Error
Handling

232
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Appendix
1

Calculation Processes

2

Printing Example

3

Error List

4

Saving to External Media

5

Management USB Stick Setting

Appendix233
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1 Calculation Processing
The following calculation processes are performed during an analysis.

1.1 STD/QC Sample Measured Data Check
1.2 DA Value Calculation
1.3 Measured Data (Concentration) Calculation and Qualitative Assessment
1.4 Prozone Check
1.5 Reagent Blank Check
1.6 Calculate Cell Blank

Appendix234
NN1-1741 Rev.8
Rev.1

1

1.1

Calculation Processing

STD/QC Sample Measured Data Check

Check whether the measurement data of STD samples or QC samples are proper values.

1.

STD sample measured data check① By looking at the large and small DA1 values at each point, checkthat the CC is showing an ascending curve.
② Check that the DA1 values of adjacent points are not the same. If
the values are the same, the condition becomes “Abnormal.”③ Based on the STD standard set on the [CC Protocol] screen,check the deviation (%) between the theoretical value and theback fit value.
・ STD-1 "Abn“rmal" if”DA is out of min/max range.

・ STD-2 If the deviation is deviated from the set value, the・ STD-5
・ STD-6

condition becomes “Abnormal.”"Abn“rmal" if”DA is out of min/max range.

The data is checked based on the limit value set on the {Set} tabon the [QC process] screen.
The condition becomes abnormal under the following conditions:When the QC setting is lower than the min value

2.

QC sample measured data checkWhen the QC setting is the max value or above

Appendix235
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1

Calculation Processing

1.2

DA Value Calculation

The DA value is the final measurement result. Measured data (concentration value: X) are calculated from DA
values and calibration curves. When a reagent is dispensed to a cell that has a sample dispensed, latex
agglutination occurs and the absorbance (ABS) changes.
The time course shows changes in absorbance.
The time course is monitored once a sample is dispensed into a cell (see Figure 5).

Time course
[ABS]
A3
A2
DA2

T3

T2

[Cycle]T0: 0th detection point

A0: T0 absorbanceT1: 1st detection point

A1: T1 absorbanceetT2: 2nd d ection point

A2: T2 absorbanceT3: 3rd detection point

A3: T3 absorbanceFigure 5

A0,A1, A2, and A3 are the mean values of absorbances of the former and current cycles.
(Ex.) T0 = 3,T1 = 4, T2 = 5, T3 = 12 [cycle]
A0 = (Absorbance of the 3rd cycle + Absorbance of the 2nd cycle)/2
A1 = (Absorbance of the 4th cycle + Absorbance of the 3rd cycle)/2A2 = (Absorbance of the 5th cycle + Absorbance of the 4rd cycle)/2A3 = (Absorbance of the 12th cycle + Absorbance of the 11th cycle)/2
However, if you set the 1st or 2nd cycle, it will be the absorbance of the set cycle.
DA values are the amount of change for A0,A1, A2, and A3.
DA1 : A3 - A1
DA2 : A2 - A0

Appendix236
NN1-1741 Rev.5
Rev.1
NN1-1741

1

1.3

Calculation Processing

Measured Data (Concentration) Calculation and Qualitative
Assessment

Measured data (concentrations) are calculated using DA values and calibration curves. The qualitative
assessment is performed by comparing the corrected measured data and the cut-off values.

1. Calculate measured data (concentrations) using
DA values and calibration curves.
Page 236 “1.2 DA Value Calculation”

2. Range check by minimum/maximum measurement
value*OR
Concentration
UR: Displayed when the measured data has exceeded the maximum
measurement value.
: Displayed when the measured data is at or below the maximum
measurement value.
: Displayed when the measured data is lower than the minimum
measurement value.

Page 217 “6.2.1 Sample/QC Protocol Settings”* Measured data is the value prior to correction such as correction by factor A/B or by applying a dilution
ratio.

Appendix237
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1

Calculation Processing

1.4

Prozone Check

Prozone checking is conducted using two methods: RBC and PRC.
RBC method: Compares the absorbance of the RBC points in STD-6 (maximum concentration point) and thesample.
PRC method: Compares the DA2 values in STD-6 (maximum concentration point) and the sample.



RBC method

When comparing the RBC point sample absorbance (a) and STD-6 absorbance (b), if the following
relationship is formed, the sample is designated as a “prozone sample.”(b) x RBC method coefficient < (a)Time course［ABS］
Prozone sample

STD-6
b

RBC point[Measured max value][Cycle]Figure 6

RBC method coefficient is set by “9 RBC method coefficient” on {Page 2}a of [Protocol setting] - [S–mple/QC
Protocol setting] screen.
Sample absorbance (a) and STD-6 absorbance (b) are the mean values of the RBC point and the former point
respectively.
(Ex.) When the RBC point is 5(a) and (b) are(Absorbance of 5th cycle + absorbance of 4th cycle)/2.
Appendix238
NN1-1741 Rev.1

1

Calculation Processing

PRC method

When comparing the DA2 values of the sample and STD-6, if the following relationship is formed, thesamples are designated as “prozone samples.”DA2STD-6 × PRC method coefficient < DA2 sample

Time course[ABS]

Prozone sample

DA2STD-6

T2[Cycle]Figure 7

DA2 sample: DA2 value of prozone sample
DA2STD-6: DA2 value of STD-6

Appendix

NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.6
Rev.1

239

1

Calculation Processing

1.5

Reagent Blank Check●A1 Check
Normal dispensing of the reagent is checked by using the T1 cycle absorbance.
The absorbance is obtained from the mean value of T1 cycle ADC value and T1-1 cycle ADC value. The value
is compared with the max value and the min value of the A1 check.
The “reagent blank error” is output if the condition is as follows.

Mean absorbance < A1 check min valueorMean absorbance > A1 check max value
Absorbance = log10(ADC space/ADC mean value) × 10000 – Cell blank value

A1 check max and min values are set by the manufacturer. Users cannot change the settings.

●DA1 Check
Normal dispensing of the reagent is checked by using the T1 cycle absorbance and the DA1 value.
The absorbance is obtained from the mean value of T1 cycle ADC value and T1-1 cycle ADC value. The value
is compared with the max value of the A1 check. Also, the DA1 value is compared with the min value of theDA1 check.
The “reagent blank error” is output if the condition is as follows.

Mean absorbance ≧ A1 check max value
andDA1 value ≦ DA1 check min value[(A1 Check) A1 check max value] and [(DA1 Check) A1 check max value] are different.
A1 check max value and DA1 check min values are set within the device. Users cannot change the settings.

※If an error occurs during the reagent blank check, please check the condition of the sample and reagent bottle andretest. If the problem occurs again, please contact the manufacturer or a legal representative. If an error occurs
during the DA1 check, the cell may need to be investigated, so please save the cell where the reagent blank error
occurred.

1.6

Calculate Cell Blank

After the analysis starts, detection is performed for all cells (55 cells) for each cycle.
The cell blank value of each cell is calculated from the following formula using ADC value (ADC space, ADC
blank cell) which was measured while the cell had no sample dispensed.

Cell blank value = log10 (ADC space/ADC blank cell) x 10000
ADC space: ADC value of the space between cells (no cell condition)
Appendix

ADC blank cell: ADC value when a blank cell is measured

240
NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.8

2 Printing Examples
This section describes various printing examples.

2.1 Positive Sample printing
2.2 Final Result Printing at Retesting
2.3 Printing when STD Sample and QC Sample are Measured
2.4 Printing Error Messages

ID of an operator
performing the test

Date and time ofsystem power on
Test start date
and time

Rack No.Rack position No.

Test item
Result of qualitative judgment
DA value
Sample sequence No.

Test item name and reagent
lot and CC measurement
date and time
Sample ID
Measurement
value
Error message(Reagent dispensing error)
Page 247

Test complete date
and time

System completion
date and time

OR, UR, and PRC are
printed at sections with ※.

Appendix241
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2

Printing Examples

2.1

Positive Sample Printing<When the number of replications is 1>“Sample information” and the positive “test result” are printed in bold letters.

<When the number of replications>1 and the mean value is a positive sample>
Only the line containing the mean value is printed in bold.
(Example: Replications = 3)

SD value of measured data

CV value of measured data

The calculation of average depends on digit setting (integer or tenths place).
Printed value is rounded to the set digit.
9. Value Format under “6.1.8 Output Format Settings (Basic Format)” on page 200.
Appendix242
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2

2.2

Printing Examples

Final Result Printing at Retesting

The Dilution factor is printed after the item name. Other sections are the same as the first test.
<When the number of replications is 1>

Dilution factor
A: Retest without dilution
A10: Dilute by a factor of 10 and retest
A20: Dilute by a factor of 20 and retest
A100: Dilute by a factor of 100 and retest
A200: Dilute by a factor of 200 and retest
A400: Dilute by a factor of 400 and retest

Appendix243
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2

Printing Examples<When the number of replications is larger than 1>

CV value of the measured value

SD value of the measured value

Appendix244
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2

2.3

Printing Examples

Printing when STD Sample and QC Sample are Measured

STD ･ QC sample
measurement startDA1 valueDA2 value

STD point No.
Average value of DA1DA2 value used forCC

CV value of DA1

CV value of DA2

Replicate No. 1

The replicate result andthe mean value areprinted for each STD
point.

Replicate No. 2
Replicate No. 3

DX (%)

Theoretical value

Back fit

CC type

Regression
coefficient

LNR-LNR : Primary - Tertiary
ALOKA : Aloka curve
3-SPLINE : Spline
1-SPLINE : Polygonal line
CC dimension

Continue to the next page
Appendix245
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2

Printing Examples

Continued from the previous page

QC sample
measurement start
QC sample No.

Measured data
Mean value of
measured values

SD value of
measured data

CV value of
measured value
The replicate result
and the mean values
are printed for each
QC.

CC measurement
date and time

Reagent lot.

CC graph

When CC is cancelled,
CANCEL is printed.

Appendix246
NN1-1741 Rev.1

2

2.4

Printing Examples

Printing Error Messages

Meanings of error messages are as follows.

Error message

Printed Error Message

Meaning

Cell Blank Error

Cell blank error

No Sample

No sample

Sample Fusoku

Sample short

No Reagent1

No R1 reagent

No Reagent2

No R2 reagent

Mixing Error

Mixing error

Reag.Blank Error

Reagent blank error

Cal.Curve1 Error

STD error (DA1)

Cal.Curve2 Error

STD error (DA2)

Samp.Pippete Err

Sample not dispensed

R1. Pippete Err

R1 reagent no dispensing

R2. Pippete Err

R2 reagent no dispensing

Sample Blank Err

Sample amount error

Control Error

Control error
Appendix247
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error List

3 Error List
This section describes error messages that are displayed on the screen, as well as error messages printed by
the printer.

3.1
Error No.
ERR#0-

ERR# 0-1001 to 0-3005 (Main)
Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure

ERR# 0-1001 1001
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007

1008

G communication error
G communication error
Unexpected commandreceived
Unexpected command received
TELEGRAM DATA ERRORTELEGRAM DATA ERROR
No reply from GLIFE
command
No reply from GLIFE command
No reply from G command
No reply from G command
Abort failed
Abort failed

Multiple absorbance data
received in the same cycle.
Multiple absorbance data
received in the same cycle.
Online ACK Timeout(Not displayed on screen)
PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[SHUT DOWN] Turn off the system.
(Not displayed on screen)
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
Touch [SHUT DOWN] to turn off the power.
Finish the sample process currently being tested.
(Not displayed on screen)
Touch [SHUT DOWN] to turn off the power.
Finish the sample process currently being tested.
(Not displayed on screen)
PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[SHUT DOWN] Turn off the system.
[CLOSE] Close error display
INF1: Ready counter* No effect on the measurement data.
However, if it occurs repeatedly, contact the seller.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE] Close error display

Appendix248
NN1-1741 Rev.2
Rev.1
NN1-1741

3

Error No.
ERR#0-

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

Error List

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure

ERR# 0-1100 1101

Online ACK timeout error
Online ACK Timeout

1102

Online NAK count error
Online NAK count1103

Online data reception error
Online data reception error

1111

Online connection error
Online connection error

1112

Online err [NG RECEIVE]
Online err [NG RECEIVE]

1113
1114

Online err [ABNORMAL
DATA]
Online err [ABNORMAL
DATA]
Online err [TIME OUT]
Online err [TIME OUT]

(Not displayed on screen)
An error occurred in communication with an external computer.
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
An error occurred in communication with an external computer.
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
An error occurred in communication with an external computer.
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
An error occurred in communication with an external computer.
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
An error occurred in communication with an external computer.
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
An error occurred in communication with an external computer.
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
An error occurred in communication with an external computer.
Operation continues automatically.

ERR# 0-1400 Insufficient test reagents
Insufficient test reagents

1409

1410

Insufficient buffer volume
Insufficient buffer volume

The reagent ran out.
Set the reagent after the assay completes.
<ERROR CANCELLATION><ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE]: Close error display.
Buffer ran out.
Set the buffer after the assay completes.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE]: Close error display.

Appendix

NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.2
Rev.1

249

3

Error List

Error
No.
ERR#0-

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

1416

Double sample barcode
Double sample barcode

1417

Sample barcode reading error
Sample barcode reading error
Sample barcode digit error

1418

Sample barcode digit error

1430

Cell check error
Cell check error
Reagent blank error
Reagent blank error

1435
1436

Cell blank error
Cell blank error

1437

Transportation Result Data Error
Transportation Result Data Error

1438

Container check results error
Container check results error

1439

Maximum number of samples
reached Warning
Maximum number of samples
reached Warning

Program error
Program error

1440

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure(Not displayed on screen)
A sample barcode is duplicated. This sample will not be tested.
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
A sample barcode couldn’t be read. This sample will be tested.
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
While reading sample barcodes, for one sample, the number ofbarcode digits exceeded the limit was found. This sample will betested.
Operation continues automatically.
(Not displayed on screen)
A measurement cell has been set. Touch [ABORT] and set the cells.
(Not displayed on screen)
The reagent blank is abnormal. Operation continues automatically.
A1 check error : Additional information INF3 : 0
DA1 check error : Additional information INF3 : 1(Not displayed on screen)
Cell blank status is abnormal. Operation continues automatically. To
replace the cells, touch [ABORT].
(Not displayed on screen)
An error occurred in rack transfer.
Touch [ABORT].
(Not displayed on screen)
CONTAINER CHECK FAIL
This sample will not be tested. Operation continues automatically.
Rack loading stopped due to reaching maximum number of sample
analysis after a system start up.
Close error display. Close the instrument under main analysis screenof [Completed]
After system restart, new analysis can be started.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR[CLOSE]: Close error display
PROGRAM ERROR
Close error display. Close the instrument under main analysis screenof [Completed]<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR[CLOSE]: Close error display

Appendix250
NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.8

3

Error No.
ERR#0-

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)
Detection start position error
Detection start position error

1441

Usable cells ran out
Usable cells ran out

1442

1443

Purified water volume 0
Purified water volume 01444

Washing solution volume 0
Washing solution volume 0
Reagent double barcode

1445
Reagent double barcode
LED deterioration detected
LED deterioration detected

1446

1447

Caution about LED
deterioration
Caution about LED
deterioration

Error List

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
Some cells output a detection start position error during cell
replacement.
Cells with an error will not be used for the assay.
The cell may be tilted.
Check the cell placement and replace the cell again.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE]: Close error display
Usable cells ran out.
After closing this error message, replace the cell on the Cell
replacement screen.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE]: Close error display(Not displayed on screen)
PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE]: Close error display(Not displayed on screen)
PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE]: Close error display
There are multiple reagents with the same barcode.
*P1 to P8: Presence of double barcode at installation positions 1 to 8
(0: Normal, 1: Double barcode)
LED has deteriorated. Check that there are no foreign objects on thetable. If the issue persists, please contact the seller.
LED wavelength (nm): Status
Wavelength nm
660, 800, 600, and 340
Status0: Normal, 1: Caution about deterioration, 2: Deterioration
detected<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE] Close error display
LED may be deteriorated. Be careful.
LED wavelength (nm): Status
Wavelength nm
660, 800, 600, and 340
Status0: Normal, 1: Careful about deterioration<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE] Close error display

Appendix251
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error List

Error No.
ERR#0-

1448

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)
Cell blank range value
error
Cell blank range value
error

Measurement
interruption occurred

Measurement
interruption occurred

1449

1450

Temperature error atreagent refrigerator
during analysis
Temperature error atreagent refrigerator
during analysis

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
Cell blank range value error occurred for some cells during cell replacement.
Cells with an error will not be used for the assay.
Check the cell condition on the Cell replacement screen.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE] Close error display
The measurement was interrupted.
INF1: Causes of interruptions No. 1 to 21
No.01: All cells were used
No.11: Container check results error
No.02: Cell shortage (for one test) No.12: Order error
No.03: Cell shortage
No.13: Puncture error(for one consecutive sample)
No.04: Empty cell
No.14: Sample dispense error
No.05: Double BC error
No.15: Reagent dispense error
No.06: Reagent shortage
No.16: Mixing error
No.07: Buffer shortage
No.17: Temperature error(reagent refrigerator)
No.08: Purified water shortage No.18: Temperature error (reaction table)
No.09: Washing solution shortage No.19: No usable reagent
No.10: LED deterioration error No.20:Temperature communication error(reagent refrigerator)
No.21: Temperature communication error(reaction table)<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE] Close error display(Not displayed on screen)
PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE] Close error display

Appendix252
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.4

3

Error No.
ERR#0-

1452

1453

1454
1455

1456

1457

1458

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)
Cell presence check error
Cell presence check error

Error List

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure

In priming before the assay, some cells output the cell presence
error.
Blocks containing cells with an error will not be used for the assay.
Check the cell condition on the Cell replacement screen.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE] Close error display
Rack error
Set rack error.
INF1: Reason for the stop
Rack transfer error
No.05: Rack barcode reading error
No.06: Rack setting outside the range<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE] Close error display
Sampling volume check error (Not displayed on screen)
Operation continues automatically.
Sampling check error

Temperature error of reaction (Not displayed on screen)table during analysis
PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
Temperature error of reaction [CLOSE] Close error display
table during analysis
Usable reagent is not(Not displayed on screen)
installed.
PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE]
Close error display
Usable reagent is notinstalled.
Temperature communication (Not displayed on screen)
PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
error at reagent refrigerator
during analysis[CLOSE] Close error display
Temperature communication
error at reagent refrigerator
during analysis
Temperature communication (Not displayed on screen)error of reaction table during PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
analysis[CLOSE] Close error display
Temperature communication
error of reaction table during
analysis

Appendix253
Rev.1
NN1-1741 Rev.4

3

Error List

Error No.
ERR#0-

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure

ERR# 0-1500 1501
1502
1503

1504

1505

Startup failed
Startup failed
Analysis end processing failed
Analysis end processing failed
Program end processing failed
Program end processing failed(Not displayed on screen)
Unable to start the system.
Touch [SHUT DOWN] to turn off the power.
(Not displayed on screen)
Unable to complete testing.
Touch [SHUT DOWN] to turn off the power.

(Not displayed on screen)
Unable to end the system.
Touch [SHUT DOWN] to turn off the power.
A required file cannot be found. FILE MISSING
INF1: MISSING FILE No.
No file1 = Config.ini
2 = Support.ini<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[SHUT DOWN] Shut down the system.
(Not displayed on screen)func.ini is abnormal or
The file is missing.
cannot be foundTouch [SHUT DOWN] to turn off the power.
func.ini is abnormal

1506

kinou.dat is abnormal or
cannot be foundkinou.dat is abnormal(Not displayed on screen)
The file is missing.
Touch [SHUT DOWN] to turn off the power.

1509

Necessary common memory
cannot be found.
Necessary common memory
cannot be found.

(Not displayed on screen)
Memory cannot be found.
Operation continues automatically.

Appendix254
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.2

3

Error No.
ERR#0-

Error List

Screen Message (Upper)
Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
Printed Message (Lower)
Commonmemory PROGRAM ERROR (MEMORY) due to file setting failure
initialization failed
INF1 : MEMORY No.1 - 53–01: Sample barcode (SysTBcr.txt) 11: Sample cup(SysTube.txt)
02: Rack information (SysRack.txt) 12: Order test (SysOdrAna.txt)
03: Environment setting (SysEnv.txt)
13: Sample/QC protocol (PrtSmpQc.txt)
04: Data output (SysDtOut.txt) 14: CC1-CC6 protocol (PrtCC.txt)
05: Output format (SysForm.txt) 15: Common protocol 1 (PrtCom1.txt)
06: RS232C setting (SysRS.txt) 16: Common protocol 2 (PrtCom2.txt)
07: Analysis method (SysSoku.txt) 17: Analysis (AnaInf.dat)
08: Alarm setting (SysAlm.txt) 18: Test mode (SokuMode.dat)
09: Screen saver (SysScrn.txt) 19: Reagent CC (SiyakuCC.dat) 10:
STD/QC run (SysStdQc.txt) 20: Reagent volume (SiyakuZan.dat)<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[SHUT DOWN] Shutdown the system.
PROGRAM ERROR (MEMORY) due to file setting failure
INF1 : MEMORY No.1 to 53
21: Buffer volume (KBufZan.dat) 31: System status ( -------- ----)
22: Shift register (--------)
32: Error information (----)
23: Supply units (KUnitinf.dat)
33: Subsystem (----)
24: Unload units (HUnitinf.dat)
34: Additional analysis (----)
25: Rack･Sample (RackInf.dat)
35: Test result (----)
26: Analysis data (AnaRslt.dat)
36: STD･QC result (----)
27: STD result data (StdRslt.dat) 37: Instrument information (----)
28: Cell blank analysis (CellBlnk.dat) 38: CC information (----)
29: Temperature information (--------) 39: Printer (----)
30: Protocol DWLD (--------)
40: Spare parts (U_Parts.dat)

1511(Messages will not be
printed.)<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[SHUT DOWN] Shutdown the system.
PROGRAM ERROR (MEMORY) due to file setting failure
INF1 : MEMORY No.1 to 53
41: Spare parts (S_Parts.dat) 51: Washing solution information (WashSol.dat)
42: Additional analysis recovery (-----) 52: Retest order information (----)
43: Reagent･CC (-----) 53: Switch display language (SysLang.txt)
44: Auto Startup (AutoStart.txt)
45: Log in information (----)
46: Cell management information (CellMng.dat)
47: Rack lane information (RackLane.dat)
48: Reagent history information (SRireki.dat) 49: Buffer information (KRireki.dat)
50: Purified water information (Water.dat )<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[Shutdown] Shutdown the system.

Appendix255
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error List

Error No.
ERR#0-

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure

ERR# 0-1600 COM port is not properly
connected

1601

PRINT ERRORCOM PORT CONNECTION FAIL.
CHECK CONNECTION.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.

COM port error[CLOSE] Close error display

ERR# 0-2000 Replace the purified waterwith the washing solution

2003

Replace from purified water to washing solution.
After the replacement, press [Close] button.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.

(The message is not printed.)

Shutdown error Warning

2004
Shutdown error Warning[CLOSE] Close error display
The system was shut down abnormally last time.
The hard disk may be damaged.
If there is something wrong with the hard disk after systemstartup, please contact our seller.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.
[CLOSE] Start up the system.

Appendix256
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error No.
ERR#0-

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

Error List

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure

ERR# 0-3000 Reagent shortage

3001

Reagent shortage.
Finish analysis.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.

Reagent shortage

Empty cell shortage

3002[CLOSE] Close error display
Analyzing cell shortage.
Finish analysis.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.

Empty cell shortage

3003[CLOSE] Close error display
STD or QC installation error STD or QC installation error
Finish analysis.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.

Installation error
QC expiration date expired

3004[CLOSE] Close error display
QC expiry date expired.
Finish analysis.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.

QC expired

Test item is undecided

3005[CLOSE] Close error display
Test item setting error
Finish analysis.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>PRESS THE FOLLOWING BUTTON TO SOLVE THE ERROR.

Test item is undecided[CLOSE] Close error display

Appendix257
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error List

3.2
Error No.
ERR#1-

ERR# 1-001 - 1-200(SS1)
Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure

ERR# 1-001 002

003

004

005

006

007

Sample nozzle Z-axis origin
error(Test)SAMP Z ORG error
Sample nozzle Z-axis origin
error(Test)SAMP Z ORG error

Sample nozzle Z-axis origin
error(Out of test)
SAMP Z ORG error

Sample nozzle Theta-axis origin
error (shaft origin error(Test)SAMP θ ORG error
Sample nozzle Theta-axis origin
error(Out of test)
SAMP θ ORG error

Sample dispensing pump origin
error(Test)SAMP P ORG error

The Z-axis of the sample nozzle could not be moved to the origin on
the reaction table.
Analyze the sample currently under analysis again.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [ABORT]. The assay ends.
The Z-axis of the sample nozzle could not be moved to the origin on
the rack or on the overflow cell.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. The Error screen closes.
The Z-axis of the sample nozzle could not be moved to the origin.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The Theta-axis of the sample nozzle could not be moved to theorigin. Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. The Error display closes.
The Theta-axis of the sample nozzle could not be moved to the origin.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The syringe of the sample dispensing pump could not be moved tothe origin.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. The Error display closes.

Appendix258
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error No.
ERR#1-

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)
Sample dispensing pumporigin error(Out of test)
SAMP P ORG error

Rack installation lane origin
error(Out of test)
Rack installation lane ORG
error
Rack conveyance lane origin
error(Out of test)
Rack conveyance lane ORG
error
Sample nozzle Z-axis jam
error(Test)SAMPZ JAM error

Error List

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
The syringe of the sample dispensing pump could not be moved to theorigin.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The rack lane could not be moved to the origin.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. Press [ABORT]. Stop the process.

The rack lane could not be moved to the origin.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. Press [ABORT]. Stop the process.

The Z-axis of the sample nozzle jammed while descending.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.
Sample nozzle Z-axis jam error The Z-axis of the sample nozzle jammed during descending.
(Out of test)<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
SAMPZ JAM error
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
Sample nozzle jam sensor error The jam sensor did not work correctly at the sample nozzle.
(Test)
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
SAMP jam sensor error<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.
Sample nozzle jam sensor error
The jam sensor did not work correctly at the sample nozzle.
(Out of test)<ERROR CANCELLATION>
SAMP jam sensor error
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.

Appendix259
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error List

Error No.
ERR#1-

Screen Message (Upper)
Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
Printed Message (Lower)
The rack could not be pulled into the end in the equipment during the
Rack conveyance error
rack transfer.
Rack conveyance error

022
Rack detection error

023
Rack detection error

Rack discharge error
Rack discharge error

024

031

Sample nozzle No liquid error(Test)SAMP No liquid
Sample nozzle No liquid error(Out of test)

032

033

SAMP No liquid
Sample nozzle Erroneous
liquid level detection error(Test)SAMP nozzle Erroneous liquid
level detection error

A rack or other obstacle may exist on the transfer line.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. Press [ABORT].
2. Remove the rack on the transfer line.
While the rack transfer, the rack could not be detected.
The result of this rack is not output.
After the analysis is completed, remove any racks in the rack set
positionand initialize with the Prep functions.
Check the rack orientation and analyze again.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. Press [Close]. Close Error display.
While unloading the rack, the rack could not be transferred tothe set position.
Or the rack could not be provided correctly.
An obstacle may exist on the transfer line.
The result for this rack is not output. Analyze again.
If the analysis result of the previous rack is output, close the Error
screen and abort.
<CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.
The liquid level could not be detected.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.
The liquid level could not be detected.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The position which the liquid level was detected was not the
expected position.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.

Appendix260
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error No.
ERR#1-

034

035

036

041

042

043

044

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)
Sample nozzle Erroneous
liquid level detection error(Out of test)
SAMP nozzle Erroneous liquid
level detection error

Overflow cell (for Sample
nozzle) Poor discharge(Test)OF Poor discharge

Overflow cell (for Sample
nozzle) Poor discharge(Out of test)
OF Poor discharge
Squeeze mechanism
Operation error(Test)
Squeeze error
Squeeze mechanism
Operation error(Out of test)
Squeeze error

Puncturing
mechanism Operation
error(Test)
Puncture error
Puncturing
mechanism Operation
error(Out of test)
Puncture error

Error List

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
The position which the liquid level was detected was not the expected
position.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
When cleaning the sample nozzle, the waste liquid in the overflow cell
could not be discharged.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. The Error screen closes.
When cleaning the sample nozzle, the waste liquid in the overflow cell
could not be discharged.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [ABORT]. The process is aborted.
The squeeze DC motor did not work correctly.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.
The squeeze DC motor did not work correctly.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry].
Restart the process.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The puncture DC motor did not work correctly.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.
The puncture DC motor did not work correctly.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.

Appendix

NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.7
Rev.1

261

3

Error List

Error No.
ERR#1-

071

072

073

074

075

076

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)
Sample and rack barcode
reader error(Test)SAMP barcode reader error
Sample and rack barcode reader
error(Test)SAMP barcode reader error

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
The communication with the barcode reader did not work correctly.
Analyze the sample currently under analysis again.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [ABORT]. The assay ends.

The communication with the barcode reader did not work correctly.
Wait for the results for samples currently the analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>① Press [ABORT].
② The assay ends when [ABORT] is pressed on the displayed dialog.
When [Close] is pressed, the current sample is analyzed through the end,
but no additional samples will be analyzed.
Sample and rack barcode reader The communication with the barcode reader did not work correctly.
error<ERROR CANCELLATION>(Out of test)
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
SAMP barcode reader error
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
Sample and rack barcode reader Reading the barcode did not complete within the specified time.
Communication timeout error
Analyze the sample currently under analysis again.
(Test)<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Barcode communication timeout Press [ABORT]. The assay ends.
Sample and rack barcode reader The reagent could not be detected.
Communication timeout error
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
(Test)
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
Barcode communication timeout <ERROR CANCELLATION>① Press [ABORT].
② The assay ends when [ABORT] is pressed on the displayed dialog.
When [Close] is pressed, the current sample is analyzed through the end,
but no additional samples will be analyzed.
Sample and rack barcode reader Reading the barcode did not complete within the specified time.
Communication timeout error<ERROR CANCELLATION>(Out of test)
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
Barcode communication timeout process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error is issued
again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.

Appendix262
NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.7
Rev.1

3

Error No.
ERR#1-

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

Error List

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure

ERR#1-101 101

105

108

109

Set the rack.
(The message is not printed.)

Close the rack setting cover.
(The message is not printed.)

Remove the rack from thedisplayed lane No.
(Test)(The message is not printed.)
Remove the rack from thedisplayed lane No.
(Out of test)(The message is not printed.)<CANCELLATION>
1. Set the rack on the lane and press [Continue]. The processcontinues.
2. When aborting the process, press [ABORT].
The process temporarily stops.
<CANCELLATION>
1. Close the rack lane cover and press [Retry]. The process restarts.
2. If the message is issued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The rack could not be ejected.
<CANCELLATION>
1. Remove the racks on the displayed lane No. and press [Retry].
Restart the process.
2. When aborting the process, press [ABORT].
The rack transfer motor was returned to the origin.
<CANCELLATION>
1. Remove the rack of lane 1 or lane 2 and press [Continue]. The
process continues.
2. When aborting the process, press [ABORT].

Appendix263
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error List

3.3
Error No.
ERR#2-

ERR# 2-001 - 2-200(SS2)
Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure

ERR#2-001 002

003

004

005

006

007

Reagent nozzle Z-axis origin
error(Test)REAGZ ORG error
Reagent nozzle Z-axis origin
error(Test)REAGZ ORG error
Reagent nozzle Z-axis origin
error(Out of test)
REAGZ ORG error
Reagent nozzle Theta-axis
origin error(Test)REAG θ ORG error
Reagent nozzle Theta-axis
origin error(Out of test)
REAG θ ORG error
Reagent dispensing pumpOrigin error(Test)REAGP ORG error

The Z-axis of the reagent nozzle could not be moved to the origin on
the reaction table.
Analyze the sample currently under analysis again.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [ABORT]. The assay ends.
The Z-axis of the Reagent nozzle could not be moved to the origin on
the reagent refrigerator or on the overflow cell.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. The Error display closes.
The Z-axis of the reagent nozzle could not be moved to the origin.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error is issued
again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The Theta-axis of the reagent nozzle could not be moved to the origin.
Wait for the results for samples currently under the analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. The Error display closes.
The Theta-axis of the reagent nozzle could not be moved to the origin.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error is issued
again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The syringe of the reagent dispensing pump could not be
moved to the origin.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. The Error display closes.

Appendix264
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error No.
ERR#2-

008

010

012

013

014

015

016

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

Error List

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure

Reagent dispensing pumpOrigin error(Out of test)
REAGP ORG error

The syringe of the reagent dispensing pump could not be moved to theorigin.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
Reaction table Origin error
The motor on the reaction table could not move to the origin.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Reaction table ORG error
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
Reagent refrigerator Origin
The motor of the reagent refrigerator could not be moved to the origin.
error<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
REAG rotation ORG error
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
Reagent nozzle Z-axis jam error The Z-axis of the reagent nozzle jammed during descending.
(Test)
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
REAGZ JAM error<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.
Reagent nozzle Z-axis jam error The Z-axis of the reagent nozzle jammed during descending.
(Out of test)<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
REAGZ JAM error
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
Reagent nozzle Jam sensor error A jam sensor error was detected at the reagent nozzle.
(Test)
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
REAG jamming sensor error<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close].
Reagent nozzle Jam sensor error A jam sensor error was detected at the reagent nozzle.
(Out of test)<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
REAG jamming sensor error
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.

Appendix265
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error List

Error No.
ERR#2-

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)

017

Reaction table Step-out error
Table motor step-out

018

Reagent refrigerator Step-out
error
Refrigerator motor step-out

Pulse motor Step-out error
Motor step-out

019

031

032

033

034

Reagent nozzle No
liquid error(Test)REAG No liquid
Reagent nozzle No
liquid error (Out of
test)
REAG No liquid

Reagent nozzle Erroneous
liquid level detection error(Test)REAG Liquid level error

Reagent nozzle Erroneous
liquid level detection error(Out of test)
REAG Liquid level error

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
The pulse motor on the reaction table stepped out.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. Press [ABORT]. End the assay.
The pulse motor of the reagent refrigerator stepped out.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close].
The pulse motor stepped out.
<Motor>1: Reaction table
6: Reagent refrigerator<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. It is
initialized, and the process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The liquid level could not be detected.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.
The liquid level could not be detected.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. The process stops.
The position which the liquid level was detected was not the
expected position.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.
The position which the liquid level was detected was not the expected
position.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. The process is aborted.

Appendix266
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error No.
ERR#2-

037

038

041

042

043

044

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)
Overflow cell (for Reagent
nozzle) Poor discharge(Test)OF Poor discharge

Overflow cell (for Reagent
nozzle) Poor discharge(Out of test)
OF Poor discharge
Reagent refrigerator Shutter
operation error(Test)
Reagent refrigerator Shutter
operation error

Reagent refrigerator shutter
operation error(Out of test)
Reagent refrigerator shutter
error
Reagent refrigerator barcode
reader error
REAG barcode reader error

Mixer operation
error(Test)
Mixer operation error

Error List

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
When cleaning the regent nozzle, the waste liquid in the overflow cell
could not be discharged.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. The Error screen closes.
When cleaning the reagent nozzle, the waste liquid in the overflow cell
could not be discharged.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [ABORT]. The process is aborted.
The shutter of the reagent refrigerator did not work
correctly.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured
samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. Close Error display.
The shutter of the reagent refrigerator did not work correctly.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The communication with the barcode reader did not work correctly<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.

The mixer arm DC motor did not work correctly above thereaction table.
Wait for the result for the currently testing sample.
Retest error samples and untested samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [ABORT]. The test ends.

Appendix267
NN1-1741 Rev.7
Rev.1

3

Error List

Error No.
ERR#2-

046

047

048

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)
Mixer operation
error(Out of test)
Mixer operation error

Mixing operation
error(Test)
Mixing error
Mixing operation
error(Out of test)
Mixing error

Temperature control error
Temperature control error

051

Detection control error
Detection control error

052

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
The mixer arm DC motor did not work correctly above the reaction
table.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry].
The process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The mixer DC motor did not work correctly.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close]. The Error screen closes.
The mixer DC motor did not work correctly.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry].
The process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
An error was detected in the temperature control.
Analyze the sample currently under analysis again.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. Press [ABORT].
If an analysis is ongoing, such analysis will be ended.
If any process other than analysis is ongoing, such process will beaborted.
An error was detected in the detection control.
Analyze the sample currently under analysis again.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. Press [ABORT].
If an analysis is ongoing, such analysis will be ended.
If any process other than analysis is ongoing, such process will beaborted.

Appendix268
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error No.
ERR#2-

053

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)
Liquid level detection control
error
Liquid level detection control
error

DC pump control error
DC pump control error

054

061

062

063

064

071

Purified water set position
Purified water shortage(Test)
Purified water shortage
Purified water set position
Purified water shortage(Out of test)
Purified water shortage
Washing solution set
position Washing solution
shortage(Test)
Washing solution shortage
Washing solution set
position Washing solution
shortage(Out of test)
Washing solution shortage
Safety guard error
Safety guard open error

Error List

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
An error was detected in the liquid level detection control.
Analyze the sample currently under analysis again.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. Press [ABORT].
If an analysis is ongoing, such analysis will be ended.
If any process other than analysis is ongoing, such process will beaborted.
An error was detected in the DC pump control.
Analyze the sample currently under analysis again.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. Press [ABORT].
If an analysis is ongoing, such analysis will be ended.
If any process other than analysis is ongoing, such process will beaborted.
Lack of solution in the purified water bottle was detected.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close].
Lack of solution in the purified water bottle was detected.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. When the bottle is replaced, press [Retry]. The process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error is issued
again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
Lack of solution in the washing solution bottle was detected.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close].
Lack of solution in the washing solution bottle was detected.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. When the bottle is replaced, press [Retry]. Restart the process.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The analysis was ended because the safety guard was opened during ananalysis.
Analyze the sample currently under analysis again.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [ABORT]. The assay ends.

Appendix269
NN1-1741 Rev.1

3

Error List

Error No.
ERR#2-

072

073

Screen Message (Upper)
Printed Message (Lower)
Mixer nozzle Presence sensor
error(Test)
Mixer nozzle Presence sensor
error
Mixer nozzle Presence sensor
error(Out of test)
Mixer nozzle Presence sensor
error

Error Description and Cancelling Procedure
The mixer nozzle could not be detected in the overflow cell.
Wait for the results for samples currently under analysis.
Re-analyze the errored samples and unmeasured samples.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
Press [Close].
The mixer nozzle could not be detected in the overflow cell.
<ERROR CANCELLATION>
1. If there is no error at the mechanical movement, press [Retry]. The
process restarts.
2. If there is an error at the mechanical movement or if an error isissued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.

ERR#2-101 101

102
103
107

111

Close the safety guard.
(The message is not printed.)

Close the reagent refrigerator
cover.
(The message is not printed.)
Check the reagent again.
(The message is not printed.)
Remove the pipes of purified
water and washing solution.
(The message is not printed.)
Replace the washing solution
line to the purified water.
(The message is not printed.)

The process temporarily stops.
<CANCELLATION>
1. Close the safety guard and press [Retry]. Restart the process.
2. If the error is issued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
The process temporarily stops.
<CANCELLATION>
1. Close the reagent refrigerator and press [Retry]. Restart the process.
2. If the error is issued again, press [ABORT]. Stop the process.
<CANCELLATION>
Close the reagent refrigerator cover and press [Continue].
<CANCELLATION>
1. Remove pipes and press [Continue]. The process continues.
2. When aborting the process, press [ABORT].
<CANCELLATION>
1. Replace the washing solution line to the purified water. Disconnect
the pipe connected to the washing solution bottle and connect thebottle to the purified water container.
2. Press [Continue]. When aborting the process, press [ABORT].

Appendix270
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4 Saving to External MediaThe following data can be saved to external media: Sample measured data information, Sample replication
information, QC measured data information, QC replication information, STD measured data information,
STD replication information, and Time course data information.
Output data are variable-length.

4.1

Sample Measured Data Information

Sample Measured Data Information is saved.
File name: ocsamp.csv

No. Item nameNote (△ is a blank [20H]))

Outputsetting1

Data type

Analysis date, re-measurement data: ‘N △’Yes

Retest data (buffer retest included): ‘A △’If the data is edited, set “E” to △.
Example) Analysis data edited: ‘NE’
2

Date of analysis

Date of analysis－

Example) September 23, 2020 -> 2020/09/23
3

Time of analysis

Time of analysis (24-hour notation)－

Example: 2:05 P.M. -> 14:05
4

Rack No.

Barcode information put on the rack－5

Position in rack

Positions in the rack: 1 - 10－

6

Sample ID

Barcode information put on the sampling bottle (*1)

Yes

7

Sample sequence No.

Measurement sequence number: 1 to 99999－

8

Measurement method counter

Unused. ",," is output.

Yes

9

Number of replications

Number of replications in the replication measurements:－

1 - 1010

DA value

Value obtained by No. 3 detection – No. 1 detection

Yes

See “Appendix 1.2 Calculation of DA Value.”
Appendix271
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4

Saving to External MediaNo. Item nameNote (△ is a blank [20H])

11

Measured data

12

Judgment result

13
14
15

SD valueCV value
Error code

Calculated measured data: Up to 7 digits in the integer
part and 1 digit in the decimal part (the number of digits
in the decimal part can be changed in the “Output Format
Settings.”)
Qualitatively converted result of measured data by the
cut off value△ -, △ +, 1+, 2+, and 3+
SD value of measured data (statistic)
CV value of measured data (statistic)
See “Appendix 4.8 List of Error Codes for External
Media Output.”

16

Test item code

Measured item code
Not output in order error (CSV format. Thus, it isdisplayed as
,
,
).

－

17

Test item nameName of measured item
Not output in order error (CSV format. Thus, it isdisplayed as
,
,
).

Yes

18

Units of inspection result

Units of measure inspection result

Yes

19

Normal value range 1

Set cut off 1 value

Yes

20

Normal value range 2

Set cut off 2 value (“*” when not set)

Yes

21

Normal value range 3

Set cut off 3 value (“*” when not set)

Yes

22

Operator ID

ID of logged-in operator

Yes

23

R1 reagent lot

Lot of used R1 reagent

Yes

24

R1 reagent expiration date

Expiration date of used R1 reagent lot

Yes

25

R2 reagent lot

Lot of used R2 reagent

Yes

26

R2 reagent expiration date

Expiration date of used R2 reagent lot

Yes

27

Buffer expiration date

Lot of used buffer (
new)

Yes

28

Buffer expiration date

Expiration date of used buffer ( , ,when the expiration date is unknown)

is output

Yes

29

Dilution factor

Sample dilution factor in a retest (0 is output in regulartests) 0, 1, 10, 20, 100, 200, 400

Yes

Appendix,

Outputsetting,

is output when brand

Yes

Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes






The item name is placed at the head of a file name as a header followed by data.
Each item is separated by a comma (,).
Output order and content depend on the setting of output item selection of the output format setting.
Zero suppression is performed for items other than date of analysis, time of analysis, rack number,
test item code, and test item name.

*1

A maximum of 50 digits are output for sample IDs when 2D code is used (option).

272
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4

4.2

Saving to External Media

Sample Replication Information

Sample replication information is saved.

File name: ocrsamp.csv

No. Item nameNote

Outputsetting1

Data type

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

2

Date of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”－

3

Time of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”－

4

Relative cell No.

Used cells No.: 1 - 55

Yes5

Rack No.

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”－

6

Position in rackSee “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”－

7

Sample ID

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”(* 1)Yes

8

Sample sequence No.

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”－

9

Replication counter

Number of replications in replication measurement: 1 - 10－

10

A1 value

See “Appendix 1.2 Calculation of DA Value.”

Yes

11

A2 value

See “Appendix 1.2 Calculation of DA Value.”

Yes

12

A3 value

See “Appendix 1.2 Calculation of DA Value.”

Yes

13

DA1 valueSee “Appendix 1.2 Calculation of DA Value.”

Yes

14

DA2 valueYes

15

Measured data

See “Appendix 1.2 Calculation of DA Value.”
It is output when there is no measured data.
See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

16

Judgment result

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

17

Error code

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

18

Test item code

Measured item code－

19

Test item name

Measured item name

Yes

20

Units of inspection result

Measured test result units

Yes

Yes

Appendix273
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4

Saving to External MediaNo. Item name

Note

21

Normal value range 1

Set cut off 1 value

Yes

22

Normal value range 2

Set cut off 2 value (“*” when not set)

Yes

23

Normal value range 3

Set cut off 3 value (“*” when not set)

Yes

24

Operator ID

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

25

R1 reagent lot

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

26

R1 reagent expiration date

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

27

R2 reagent lot

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

28

R2 reagent expiration date

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

29

Buffer expiration date

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

30

Sample dilution factor

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

31

Dilution factor

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

32

A0 value

See “Appendix 1.2 Calculation of DA Value.”

Yes






OutputsettingThe item name is placed at the head of a file name as a header followed by data.
Each item is separated by a comma (,).
Output order and content depend on the setting of output item selection of the output format setting.
Zero suppression is performed for items other than date of analysis, time of analysis, rack number,
test item code, and test item name.
Sample uninstallation” is not output for Sample Replication Information.
Sample Replication Information is not output for no order and order error.

*1

The maximum of 50 digits are output for sample IDs when 2D code is used (option).

Appendix274
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.5

4

4.3

Saving to External MediaQC Measured Data Information

QC measured data information is saved.

File name: ocqc.csv

No. Item nameNote

Outputsetting1

Data type

QC data:‘Cx’ x: 1 – 4 QC numbers

Yes

2

Date of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

3Time of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

4

Rack No.

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

5

Position in rackSee “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

6

Sample sequence No.

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

7

QC lot

QC lotYes

8

Number of replications

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

9

DA value

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

10

Measured data

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

11

Judgment result

Not output

Yes

12

SD value

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

13

Error code

Yes

14

Test item code

See “Appendix 4.8 List of Error Codes for External Media
Output.”Measured item code

15

Test item name

Measured item name

Yes

16

QC ID

Barcode information put on the QC container (*1)

Yes

17

Units of inspection result

Units of measured inspection result

Yes

18

Operator ID

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

19

Control expiration date

QC expiration date

Yes

20

R1 reagent lot

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

21

R1 reagent expiration date

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

22

R2 reagent lot

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

23

R2 reagent expiration date

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

Yes

Appendix275
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4

Saving to External Media






The item name is placed at the head of a file name as a header followed by data.
Each item is separated by a comma (,).
Output order and content depend on the setting of output item selection of the output format setting.
Zero suppression is performed for items other than date of analysis, time of analysis, rack number,
test item code, and test item name.

*1

A maximum of 50 digits are output for sample IDs when 2D code is used (option).

Appendix276
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4

4.4

Saving to External MediaQC Replication Information

Information for each QC replication is saved.

File name: ocrqc.csv

No. Item nameNote

Outputsetting1

Data type

See “Appendix 4.3 QC Measured Data Information.”

Yes

2

Date of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

3Time of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

4

Relative cell No.

See “Appendix 4.2 Sample Replication Information.”Yes

5

Rack No.

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

6

Position in rackSee “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

7

Sample sequence No.

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

8

QC lotSee “Appendix 4.3 QC Measured Data Information.”Yes

9

Replication counterSee “Appendix 4.2 Sample Replication Information.”

Yes

10

A1 value

See “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

Yes

11

A2 value

See “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

Yes

12

A3 value

See “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

Yes

13

DA1 valueSee “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

Yes

14

DA2 valueSee “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

Yes

15

Measured data

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

16

Judgment result

Not output.

Yes

17

Error code

See “Appendix 4.8 List of Error Codes for External Media Output.”

Yes

18

Test item code

Measured item code

Yes

19

Test item name

Measured item name

Yes

20

QC ID

Barcode information put on the QC container (*1)

Yes

21

Units of inspection result

Units of measured sample result

Yes

Appendix277
NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.5

4

Saving to External MediaNo. Item name

Note

22

Operator ID

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

23

Control expiration date

QC expiration date

Yes

24

R1 reagent lot

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

25

R1 reagent expiration date

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

26

R2 reagent lot

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

27

R2 reagent expiration date

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

28

A0 value

See “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

Yes





*1

Outputsetting

The item name is placed at the head of a file name as a header followed by data.
Each item is separated by a comma (,).
Output order and content depend on the setting of output item selection of the output format setting.
Zero suppression is performed for items other than date of analysis, time of analysis, rack number,
test item code, and test item name.
A maximum of 50 digits are output for sample IDs when 2D code is used (option).

Appendix278
Rev.1
NN1-1741 Rev.5

4

4.5

Saving to External MediaSTD Measured Data Information

STD Measured Data Information is saved.

File name: ocstd.csv



No. Item name

Note

1

Date of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

2Time of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

3

Rack No.

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

4

Position in rackSee “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

5

STD point No.

Measurement point No. (STD1 - STD6): 1 - 6

Yes

6

DA1 valueSee “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

Yes

7
8
9

DA2 value
DA1 applying value
DA1CV value

See “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”
Concentration acquired by applying DA1 to CC
DA1 CV value (statistic)

Yes
Yes
Yes

10
11
12
13

DA2CV value
DA1SD value
DA2SD value
Theoretical value

DA2 CV value (statistic)
DA1 SD value (statistic)
DA2 SD value (statistic)
STD concentration

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

14

Number of replications

STD Number of replications

Yes

15

Error code

See “Appendix 4.8 List of Error Codes for External Media Output.”

Yes

16

Test item code

Measured item code

Yes

17

Test item name

Measured item name

Yes

18

R1 reagent lot

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

19

R1 reagent expiration date

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

20

R2 reagent lot

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

21

R2 reagent expiration date

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

22
23

Cal. lotCal. expiration date

Calibrator lot
Calibrator expiration date

Yes
Yes







Outputsetting

The item name is placed at the head of a file name as a header followed by data.
Each item is separated by a comma (,).
Output order and content depend on the setting of output item selection of the output format setting.
Zero suppression is performed for items other than date of analysis, time of analysis, rack number,
test item code, and test item name.
Appendix279
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4

Saving to External Media

4.6

STD Replication Information

Information for each STD replication is saved.

File name: ocrstd.csv



No. Item nameNote

Outputsetting1Date of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

2Time of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

3

Relative cell No.

See “Appendix 4.2 Sample Replication Information.”Yes

4

Rack No.

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

5

Position in rackSee “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”Yes

6

STD point No.

See “Appendix

4.5 STD Measured Data Information.”Yes

7

Replication counterSee “Appendix 4.2 Sample Replication Information.”Yes

8

A1 value

See “Appendix 1.2 Calculation of DA Value.”Yes

9

A2 value

See “Appendix 1.2 Calculation of DA Value.”

Yes

10

A3 value

See “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

Yes

11

DA1 valueSee “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

Yes

12

DA2 valueSee “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

Yes

13

Error code

See “Appendix 4.8 List of Error Codes for External Media Output.”

Yes

14

Test item code

Measured item code

Yes

15

Test item name

Measured item name

Yes

16

R1 reagent lot

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

17

R1 reagent expiration date See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

18

R2 reagent lot

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

19

R2 reagent expiration date See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”

Yes

20
21
22

Cal. lotCal. expiration dateA0 value

Yes
Yes
Yes





Appendix

Calibrator lot
Calibrator expiration date
See “Appendix 1.2 Calculation of DA Value.”

The item name is placed at the head of a file name as a header followed by data.
Each item is separated by a comma (,).
Output order and content depend on the setting of output item selection of the output format setting.
Zero suppression is performed for items other than date of analysis, time of analysis, rack number,
test item code, and test item name.

280
NN1-1741Rev.5
Rev.1
NN1-1741

44.7

Saving to External MediaTime Course Data Information

Information for the time course data is saved.

File name: tcourse.csv



No. Item name

Note

1

Time course information of relative cell 1

Cell information 1
・
・
・

n

Output setting・・・

Cell information n

－
・
・
・

Time course information of relative cell n－Cell information #

No. Item name

Note

1

Date of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”－

2

Time of analysis

See “Appendix 4.1 Sample Measured Data Information.”－3

Relative cell No.

See “Appendix 4.2 Sample Replication Information.”－

4

Test item code

Measured item code－

5

Test item name

Measured item name－6

Cell blank ABS value

7

ABS value of 1st cycle

See “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”－8

ABS value of 2nd cycle

See “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

－

・
・
・
26

Output setting・・・

ABS value of 20th cycleSee “Appendix 1.2 DA Value Calculation.”

・
・
・
－

The file contains only data without a header.
Each item is separated by a comma (,).
CR/LF is added as a delimiter, and EOF is added at the end of the file.
Zero suppression is performed for items other than date of analysis, time of analysis, rack number,
test item code, and test item name.

Appendix281
NN1-1741 Rev.1

4

Saving to External Media

4.8

List of Error Codes for External Media Output

CodeError content

10
01
02
03
04

Sample barcode read error
Sample shortage, No sample
No reagent error
RBC (Prozone)
PRC (Prozone)

05

OR (Over Range)

Positive/Negative
judgment only06

UR (Under Range)－

07

Sample dispense error(Sample nozzle jamming, etc.)
Reagent dispense error(Reagent nozzle jamming, etc.)－

Dispensing is not conducted.

－－

Dispensing of R1 reagent or R2 reagent
is not conducted. Dispensing of buffer
can also cause this error.
No mixing (agitation) is conducted.

08

09

Measured data
(*3)
Yes
－
－
Yes

Note

Dispensing is not conducted.
*2

Positive/Negative
judgment only－

The reagent blank is abnormal.

0B
0D
11
12

Mixer error(Mixer jamming, etc.)
Reagent blank error(A1 check, DA1 check)
No CC
QC control limit check error
Combination error of ”10” + ”01” errors
Combination error of”10” + ”02” errors

－
－
－
－

Includes mismatch of CC lot.
*1
*1

13

Combination error of”10” + ”03” errors

Yes

*1

14

Combination error of”10” + ”04” errors

－

*1

15

Combination error of”10” + ”05” errors

－

*1

16

Combination error of”10” + ”06” errors

－

*1

17

Combination error of”10” + ”07” errors

－

*1

18

Combination error of”10” + ”08” errors

－

*1

19

Combination error of”10” + ”09” errors

－

*1

1A

Combination error of”10” + ”0A” errors

－

*1

1B

Combination error of”10” + ”0B” errors

－

*1

0A

*1

11 - 1B is a combined error with two errors overlapped. No other error is overlapped.

*2“No reagent error” is output if the reagent volume could not be detected when dispensing the reagent is attempted.

*3

For errors with “Yes” in the “Measured data” field outputs the measured data and the judgment result.
For errors with “-“ in the “Measured data” field outputs blank (20H) to the measured data and the judgment result.

Appendix282
NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.8
Rev.1

5 Management USB Stick Setting
When saving measurement data or other data to a USB stick, the USB stick needs to be set as a management USB
stick first.
This section describes the procedure to set a USB stick as a management USB stick.

5.1

How to Set a Management USB Stick1

Set an administrator ID.
For setting an administrator ID, see “6.1.10
User Account Settings” on page 206.

2

Select “ON” for [Operator management].
For operator management setting, see “6.1.12
Operator Mode” on page 212.

3

Log in using the administrator ID.
See “2.3 Logging In” on page 28.

4

Touch [Maintenance] on the [MENU] screen.
* [Maintenance] screen opens.

5{Create a management USB} button.

* [Create a management USB] screen
opens.

Appendix

Rev.3
NN1-1741 Rev.1

283

5

Management USB Stick Setting

6

Insert the USB stick.

7

Touch {Continue}.

8

Touch {Start}.

{Cancel}: Closes the dialog box.
{Discard}: Aborts setting and returns to [Maintenance]screen.
{Start}: Set the inserted USB stick as a management
USB stick.

9

The inserted USB stick has beensuccessfully set as a management USB
stick.

10 Remove the USB stick from the system.

Appendix284
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Index/Glossary
Index

A
Abort

76

Accuracy control

137

Additional setting

70

Analysis― completion of analysis

75― item setting198― main screen during analysis

23

B
Backup32, 215

C
Calibrator
CC protocol setting

47
34, 224

Cell blank83

Cleaning

84, 170

Close
Config.
Control panel

75
32, 190
10

Index/Glossary285
NN1-1741 Rev.1

IndexD
DA value calculation

236

Daily operation flow

35

Data output

32, 192

Data output destination
selection

192

Drain tank— check46— process91— cancellation

230

E
Error

— button229— list

248

— log

88

— screen

228

External media

44, 203, 271, 283

I
Initial test

60

Initialization

162

Intra-day/Inter-day data

Item selection— deletion

147— editing145— range specification149— screen

142
116, 125

Index/Glossary286
NN1-1741 Rev.1

IndexL
Language setting

32, 210

List of users

30

Login

28
— changing password

Logout159
158

M
Measurement cell
replacement

78

MENU screen

16

O
Online settings

195

Operator mode

32, 212Output format setting

32, 200

Index/Glossary

287
NN1-1741 Rev.1

IndexP
Parts checklist

86, 178

PRC method

239

Primary power switch

10

Prime

164

Printer

10, 44

Printing— Example of real-time printing241― (CC)

56― (Sample time course)131― (STD time course)

132

Protocol settings

33,217

Prozone judgment

238

Purified water bottle

41, 43Q
QC— lot

Qualitative judgment— deletion

141— list137— selection

140— process65— sample47, 65237

Index/Glossary

288
NN1-1741 Rev.1

IndexR
Rack— information— setting73
32, 188

Range specification―(intra-day/inter-day data)―(replicate data)―(test data )RBC method

149
123, 125
102
238

Reagent— barcode— blank check40, 50, 52
240— setting25, 37— volume

72

Replication— data item selection

116, 125— data range specification

123, 125— data search126— list display

114

Restore32, 216

Retest62

Index/Glossary289
NN1-1741
NN1-1741 Rev.1
Rev.8

IndexS
Safety guard

10

Sample— additional setting— barcode setting

70
32, 182, 184— ID editing112— setting

58

Sample/QC protocol
settings

34, 217— check56— creation

47— editing/re-calculating128— list57

STD— replicate

118, 120— sample

47

System setting

31, 182

System switch

10

T
Test data— measurement datespecification

100— output109— range specification102— screen indication96— search

106

Time course―(sample)

131, 133

Time course―(STD)

132, 135

Time course

Index/Glossary

290
NN1-1741 Rev.1

IndexU
User account setting

32, 206

W
Washing

166

Washing solution bottle

42, 43

X—

X-R control— display151— range change

155

Index/Glossary291
NN1-1741 Rev.1

GlossaryA
ABS
A0, A1, A2, and A3
Logarithm of the ratio of the strength of incident light striking a sample (Io) and the strengthof the transmitted light (I) (i.e. Io/I).
Analysis mode
Used when the sample is analyzed for the first time. One of the measurement modes.

B
Back fit value
The value obtained by fitting absorbance to a calibration curve.

D
DA value
Absorbance difference. Calculated as the amount of change in absorbance. For example,
DA1 = A3-A1 [ABS]DA2 = A2-A0 [ABS]Data
The concentration value of a target, such as hemoglobin.
Measured data (concentration values) calculated using DA values and calibration curves.

J
Jam error
An error indicating that something is touching the sample nozzle or mixer.

Index/Glossary

292
Rev.5
NN1-1741 Rev.1

GlossaryP
PRC method
Compares the DA2 values of STD-6 (the highest concentration of an STD sample series) anda patient sample.
ProzonePhenomenon where there are excessive antibodies or antigens, and observable reactions in a
mixture of specific antigens and antibodies no longer occur.
This is seen in high value samples. Samples where the amount of change decreases in thelate stage of a reaction are referred to as prozone samples.

Q
QC (sample)
Control sample. Also referred to as reference material or a reference sample.
QC value check
Check based on the control limit values set on the [QC process] screen.
Specification:
When less than Min Value +1: Abnormal
When Max Value +1 or more: AbnormalR
RBC method
Compares the absorbance at the RBC point (in the initial stage of a reaction) of the highest
concentration of an STD sample series (STD 6) and a patient sample.
Remeasure mode
Measures the sample again. One of the measure modes.
Remeasured samples are handled in the same manner as first test samples.
Retest mode
Retests samples measured in the analysis mode. However, they are not punctured again. Oneof the measurement modes.

Index/Glossary

293
NN1-1741 Rev.1

GlossaryS
STD (sample)
The calibrator sample. Also referred to as standard material or standard sample.

T
Time course
Results (graph) of measuring/recording changes in absorbance as time passes.

Index/Glossary294
NN1-1741 Rev.1

Manufacturer
EIKEN CHEMICAL CO., LTD.
4-19-9, TAITO, TAITO-KU, TOKYO 110-8408, JAPANTEL : +81-280-56-2822
FAX : +81-280-56-2707
URL :http://www.eiken.co.jp/en/ifu

April 2024 NN1-1741 Rev.9